advertisement
Enterprise IP Solutions
OfficeServ 7400
Programming
Guide
Publication Information
Samsung Business Communications reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this publication for any reason.
Samsung Business Communications also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
Disclaimer
Samsung Business Communications is not responsible for errors or problems arising from customers not installing, programming or operating their Samsung systems as described in this manual.
Copyright 2006
Samsung Business Communications
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means – graphic, electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopy or information retrieval system – without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
200
6/05/OS7400(PG) Version 1.1
EU Declaration of Conformity
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
259 Gongdan-Dong, Gumi-City Kyungbuk, Korea, 730-030
(factory name, address) declare under our sole responsibility that the product
Digital Keyphone System model "OfficeServ 7400"
to which this declaration relates is in conformity with
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:92/31/EEC
By application of the following standards
EN55022: 1998 +A1:2000+A2:2003
EN55024: 1998 +A1:2001+A2:2003
EN61000-3-2: 2000
EN61000-3-3: 1995+A1:2001
EN60 95 0- 1 : 20 01 ( 1s t E di t i o n ) an d / o r EN6 09 50 - 1: 2 00 1
(Manufacturer)
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd
259, Gongdan-Dong, Gumi-City
Kyungbuk, Korea, 730-030
2005-12-23 YJ Min
...................................................
(place and date of issue)
(Representative in the EU)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park
Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire
GU46 6GG, UK
2005-12-23 Peter Park
...................................................
(place and date of issue)
YoungJin Min / General Manager
.................................................................................
(name and signature of authorized person)
Peter Park / Manager
...............................................................................
(name and signature of authorized person)
Intended Use
This telephone system is intended to provide the user with voice communication between the system extensions and connection to the public switched telephone network by digital or analogue links.
The telephone system may be provided with the ability to communicate with local computer networks to provide CTI functions and features. In this case, it is capable of passing information to the computer network via a specified link.
The system is powered by mains voltage and can optionally be powered by batteries. Details of all connections and power arrangements are provided in the instructions for use. It should not be used in any other way.
INTRODUCTION
This is the programming guide for the OfficeServ 7400 keyphone system. You can use a digital phone to quickly and easily change the system setup through MMC (Man Machine
Communication) programming. Each MMC is used for a specific purpose and is given its own number.
This guide describes each MMC program in detail and provides an example of its use. If you have any questions regarding your OfficeServ 7400 system or how to program it, call your authorized Samsung dealer.
Guide Contents
This guide comprises two chapters and an annex.
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
This chapter describes things you need to know before starting MMC programming. For example, it describes the special programming buttons on the digital phone and the precautions you need to take.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order.
ANNEX. Abbreviations
Explains abbreviations frequently used in this guide and related guides.
Reference Guides
The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7400 system.
OfficeServ 7400 Installation Guide
Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7400 system.
Samsung Business Communications i
Introduction OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
OfficeServ 7400 General Description
Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7400 system.
WIP-5000M User Guide
This is a user’s guide for the WIP-5000M mobile telephone designed to use the wireless
LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7400 system.
Conventions Used in this Guide
WARNING
Provides information or instructions that you should follow in order to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION
Provides information or instructions that you should follow in order to avoid service failure or damage to the system.
NOTE
Indicates additional information for reference.
Samsung Business Communications ii
Introduction OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
WARNING
Caution
When using Auto Record (MMC 752)
Make sure that you are not violating any laws on the use of recording equipment.
Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.
CAUTION
CALL COST (MMC 508)
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk module.
If intending to make changes in MMCs 503, 506, 510, 805, 807 or 816
Do not change the default levels without the assistance of your dealer or Samsung Technical Support.
Compliance with the National Version Standards
For the national version, OfficeServ 7400 is designed to comply with the standards of the corresponding country. Therefore, if you need to use MMC 812 (Set
Country Code), please consult your dealer for advice.
Samsung Business Communications iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Conventions Used in this Guide...................................................................................................... ii
Caution .......................................................................................................................................... iii
Overview of MMC Programming 1-1
1 Station-Level Programming ................................................................................................... 1-6
2 Customer-Level Programming............................................................................................... 1-7
3 Technician-Level Programming ............................................................................................1-12
Phone Function..........................................................................................................................1-20
Networking Function ..................................................................................................................1-21
VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) Function .............................................................................1-21
WLAN (Wireless LAN) Function.................................................................................................1-21
LCR (Least Cost Routing) Function ...........................................................................................1-22
Voice Mail Function....................................................................................................................1-22
Diagnosis Function ....................................................................................................................1-23
Hotel Function............................................................................................................................1-23
Samsung Business Communications iv
Table of Contents OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ANNEX. Abbreviations A-1
A – C ....................................................................................................................................... A-1
D – H ....................................................................................................................................... A-2
I – M ....................................................................................................................................... A-3
N – R ....................................................................................................................................... A-4
S – U ....................................................................................................................................... A-5
V – X ....................................................................................................................................... A-6
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5021D & ITP-5121D Phone ................................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S & ITP-5107S Phone............................................................................. 1-4
Samsung Business Communications v
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC
Programming
MMC is short for Man Machine Communication, a means of programming your telephone system via a digital display phone. This chapter covers the things you need to know before you start MMC programming. The phone’s special programming buttons, and precautions you should take while programming, are discussed.
Introduction to Programming
Programming means setting and changing the data that is used for the system operating program. There are three levels of MMC programming: technician-, customer-, and stationlevel. Technician- and customer-level programming requires a passcode to access MMCs and is done by the installing technician and system administrator respectively. Station level programming does not require a passcode and can be done by phone users.
You need a digital display (LCD) phone in order to carry out programming.
Technician-Level Programming
This level allows access to all MMCs and is required, normally, at the time the system is installed to set up the system for the customer’s requirements. Some MMCs may cause the system to fail if used without a thorough understanding of system operation. The installing technician decides what MMCs to make accessible at customer level (using MMC 802) to allow the system administrator to refine the system setup when it is operating.
Customer-Level Programming
The system administrator (customer) can do programming allowed by the installer in MMC
802 to change or enter new information for the system when it is in operation.
Station-Level Programming
Programming can be done at station level by the administrator, or individual station users via their own phones, to change the data for individual phones only. The MMCs accessible are fewer than those available at other levels
Samsung Business Communications
1-1
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Phones Used for Programming
You need a digital display (LCD) phone in order to carry out programming. All use special buttons to select options on the display screen.
5000 and 5100 Series Phones
The 5000 and 5100 Series comprise:
(1) large LCD display phones, DS-5012L / 5012LE and ITP-5012L / 5112L, and
(2) 2-line LCD display phones, DS-5007S / 5014S / 5038S / 5014D / 5021D and ITP-
5014D / 5021D / 5114D / 5121D / 5107S.
Some examples are shown in the figures below.
Programmable Buttons (21)
LCD Display
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
‘A’ Button
‘B’ Button
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Programmable Buttons (17)
Dial Buttons
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Microphone
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Figure 1.1 DS-5038S Phone
Samsung Business Communications
1-2
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Programmable Buttons (14)
LCD Display
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
‘A’ Button
‘B’ Button
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Dial Buttons
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Navigation Buttons
Microphone
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Figure 1.2 DS/ITP-5014D & ITP-5114D Phone
Programmable Buttons (21)
LCD Display
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
‘A’ Button
‘B’ Button
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Dial Buttons
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5021D & ITP-5121D Phone
Navigation Buttons
Microphone
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Samsung Business Communications
1-3
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DS-5014S
(Programmable Buttons : 14)
‘A’
Speaker
Dial Buttons
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Microphone
DS-5007S & ITP-5107S
(Programmable Buttons : 7)
‘A’
DS-5000S
(Programmable Buttons : 0)
Programmable Buttons
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Status Indicator
LCD screen
Volume Button
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S & ITP-5107S Phone
5000/5100 Series 2-line LCD phones have 38, 21, 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be programmed with functions. Also, there are several other function buttons: the dial buttons, the volume control buttons, the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone number dialled, the conference button for setting up conference calls, the transfer button used to transfer a call to another station, the hold button to hold a call, and the speaker button for using the speakerphone. The navigation buttons (on ‘D’ prefix phones only) are used for easy selection of phone options and menus.
The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information. Using three colours (red, green, and yellow) the station status indicator displays the current status of station.
Samsung Business Communications
1-4
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
During programming, some of the buttons are used for the following special functions: y y
Volume ( ) buttons : Scroll through items in the display.
Redial ( ) button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all -- rather than y Speaker ( ) button: Save data and proceed to the next program y Hold ( ) button: Erase the entered data y Transfer ( ) button: Enter programming mode / Save data and exit programming y Soft buttons: Save data and/or move the cursor left and right y ‘A’ button: Select uppercase or lowercase text
NOTE: Large LCD phones do not have programmable buttons. Instead, they display programming functions on the LCD for selection via special buttons. Refer to your keyset user guide for more information.
Precautions When Programming
y y
Programming can be done on any digital LCD phone.
Programming can be done only while the handset is on hook (the phone is in ‘idle’
state). y If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, reenter the y If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming (default is 60 y seconds, but this can be changed), the phone exits from programming mode.
Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up, the Transfer button is pressed, or the phone is unplugged. Any data previously entered in the display is
saved.
Samsung Business Communications
1-5
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Program (MMC) List By Programming Level
The following lists show MMC programs categorized according to their use at the three programming levels: station, customer and technician.
1 Station-Level Programming
MMC No.
MMC: 100
MMC: 101
MMC: 102
MMC: 103
MMC: 104
MMC: 105
MMC: 106
MMC: 107
MMC: 108
MMC: 109
MMC: 110
MMC: 111
MMC: 112
MMC: 113
MMC: 114
MMC: 115
MMC: 116
MMC: 117
MMC: 118
MMC: 119
MMC: 120
MMC: 121
MMC: 122
MMC: 125
MMC Name
STATION LOCK
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
CALL FORWARD
SET ANSWER MODE
STATION NAME
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
KEY EXTENDER
STATION STATUS
DATE DISPLAY
STATION ON/OFF
PHONE RING TONE
ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
VIEW MEMO NUMBER
PHONE VOLUME
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
ALARM AND MESSAGE
EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
CONFERENCE GROUP
CALLER ID DISPLAY
LARGE LCD OPTIONS
PHONE LANGUAGE
NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
EXECUTIVE STATE
Samsung Business Communications
1-6
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
2 Customer-Level Programming
MMC No.
MMC: 200
MMC: 201
MMC: 202
MMC: 203
MMC: 204
MMC: 205
MMC: 206
MMC: 207
MMC: 208
MMC: 209
MMC: 210
MMC: 211
MMC: 214
MMC: 217
MMC: 220
MMC: 221
MMC: 222
MMC: 224
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC Name
OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
COMMON BELL CONTROL
ASSIGN LOUD BELL
BARGE-IN TYPE
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
ASSIGN RING TYPE
ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
EXTENSION TYPE
FAX PAIR
AUDIO PROMPT
Samsung Business Communications
1-7
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC No.
MMC: 300
MMC: 301
MMC: 302
MMC: 303
MMC: 304
MMC: 305
MMC: 306
MMC: 308
MMC: 309
MMC: 310
MMC: 312
MMC: 314
MMC: 315
MMC: 316
MMC: 317
MMC: 318
MMC: 319
MMC: 320
MMC: 323
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC Name
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
ASSIGN STATION COS
PICKUP GROUPS
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
ALLOW CALLER ID
CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
COPY STATION USABLE
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
BRANCH GROUP
PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
Samsung Business Communications
1-8
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC No.
MMC: 400
MMC: 401
MMC: 402
MMC: 403
MMC: 404
MMC: 405
MMC: 406
MMC: 407
MMC: 408
MMC: 409
MMC: 410
MMC: 411
MMC: 412
MMC: 413
MMC: 414
MMC: 415
MMC: 416
MMC: 417
MMC: 418
MMC: 419
MMC: 420
MMC: 421
MMC: 422
MMC: 423
MMC: 424
MMC: 426
MMC: 428
MMC: 432
MMC: 433
MMC: 434
MMC: 436
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC Name
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
TRUNK STATUS READ
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
VMS CALL TYPE
MPD/PRS SIGNAL
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN
E1/PRI CRC4
BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
BRI OPTIONS
PRI OPTIONS
MSN DIGIT
TRUNK COS
S/T MODE
BRI S0 MAPPING
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
SET H-TRK
COST RATE
CONNECTION STATUS
TRUNK TMC GAIN
Samsung Business Communications
1-9
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Timer- and Tone-Related MMCs
MMC No.
MMC: 500
MMC: 501
MMC: 502
MMC: 503
MMC: 504
MMC: 505
MMC: 506
MMC: 507
MMC: 508
MMC: 510
MMC: 511
MMC: 512
MMC: 513
MMC: 514
MMC: 515
MMC Name
SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
SYSTEM TIMERS
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
TONE CADENCE
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
CALL COST
SLI RING CADENCE
MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
HOTEL TIMER
TONE SOURCE
DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT
MMC No.
MMC: 600
MMC: 601
MMC: 602
MMC: 603
MMC: 604
MMC: 605
MMC: 606
MMC: 607
MMC: 608
MMC: 609
MMC: 611
MMC: 612
MMC: 614
MMC: 615
MMC: 616
Samsung Business Communications
MMC Name
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
STATION GROUP NAME
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
UCD OPTIONS
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
CALL LOG BLOCK
ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
1-10
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Tables, Codes and Voice Mail MMCs
MMC No.
MMC: 700
MMC: 701
MMC: 702
MMC: 703
MMC: 704
MMC: 705
MMC: 706
MMC: 707
MMC: 708
MMC: 709
MMC: 710
MMC: 711
MMC: 712
MMC: 713
MMC: 714
MMC: 715
MMC: 716
MMC: 717
MMC: 718
MMC: 719
MMC: 720
MMC: 721
MMC: 722
MMC: 723
MMC: 724
MMC: 725
MMC: 726
MMC: 727
MMC: 728
MMC: 740
MMC: 746
MMC: 747
MMC: 750
MMC: 751
MMC: 752
MMC Name
COPY COS CONTENTS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
AUTHORIZATION CODE
ACCOUNT CODE
TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
UK LCR OPTION
UCD AGENT ID
MY AREA CODE
IDLE DISPLAY
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
SMDR OPTIONS
VM/AA OPTIONS
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
CID TRANSLATION TABLE
STATION PAIR
COSTING DIAL PLAN
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
VM CARD RESTART
ASSIGN MAILBOX
AUTO RECORD
Samsung Business Communications
1-11
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 753
MMC: 754
MMC: 755
MMC: 756
MMC: 757
MMC: 758
MMC: 759
MMC: 760
MMC: 761
MMC: 762
MMC: 763
MMC Name
WARNING DESTINATION
VM HALT
VM ALARM
ASSIGN VMMOH
VM IN/OUT
VM DAY/NIGHT
CLI RINGING
ITEM COST TABLE
TAX RATE SETUP
ROOM COST RATE
SECOND LCR
3 Technician-Level Programming
MMC No.
MMC: 813
MMC: 815
MMC: 816
MMC: 818
MMC: 819
MMC: 820
MMC: 821
MMC: 822
MMC: 823
MMC: 824
MMC: 825
MMC: 826
MMC: 800
MMC: 801
MMC: 802
MMC: 803
MMC: 805
MMC: 806
MMC: 807
MMC: 810
MMC: 811
MMC: 812
MMC Name
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
TX LEVEL AND GAIN
CARD PRE-INSTALL
PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
HALT PROCESSING
RESET SYSTEM
SET COUNTRY CODE
HOTEL OPERATION
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
CONFERENCE GAIN
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
ASSIGN NETWORK COS
NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS
ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
Samsung Business Communications
1-12
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC: 851
MMC: 852
MMC: 853
MMC: 854
MMC: 855
MMC: 856
MMC: 857
MMC: 858
MMC: 859
MMC: 860
MMC: 861
MMC: 865
MMC: 889
MMC: 890
MMC: 838
MMC: 840
MMC: 841
MMC: 842
MMC: 844
MMC: 845
MMC: 846
MMC: 847
MMC: 848
MMC: 849
MMC: 850
MMC No.
MMC: 827
MMC: 829
MMC: 830
MMC: 831
MMC: 832
MMC: 833
MMC: 834
MMC: 835
MMC: 836
MMC: 837
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC Name
CRM DSP MODE
LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
VoIP ACCESS CODE
VoIP IP TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GK OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
IP PHONE INFORMATION
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
SIP STATION INFORMATION
IP STATION TYPE
WLAN PARAMETERS
WIP INFORMATION
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
WLAN IP/MAC LIST
WLAN CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MAINTENANCE BUSY
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
DISPLAY SYSTEM OPTIONS
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
VIRTUAL CABINET
ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM
HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
UCD STATUS SERVICE
SYSTEM OPTIONS
FAN POWER CONTROL
DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
INITIALIZE PORT
Samsung Business Communications
1-13
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
Program (MMC) List by Name
This program list is arranged alphabetically.
MMC Name
ACCOUNT CODE
ALARM AND MESSAGE
ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
ALARM REPORTING
ALLOW CALLER ID
ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN
ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
ASSIGN LOUD BELL
ASSIGN MAILBOX
ASSIGN NETWORK COS
ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS
ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
ASSIGN RING TYPE
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 505
MMC: 410
MMC: 416
MMC: 411
MMC: 304
MMC: 605
MMC: 305
MMC: 205
MMC: 751
MMC: 823
MMC: 821
MMC: 825
MMC: 600
MMC: 608
MMC: 507
MMC: 208
MMC: 606
MMC: 301
MMC: 601
MMC: 309
MMC: 604
MMC: 317
MMC: 708
MMC: 116
MMC: 112
MMC: 851
MMC: 312
MMC: 612
MMC: 611
MMC: 209
MMC: 308
MMC: 303
MMC: 701
Samsung Business Communications
1-14
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC Name
ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
ASSIGN VMMOH
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
AUDIO PROMPT
AUTHORIZATION CODE
AUTO RECORD
BARGE-IN TYPE
BRANCH GROUP
BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
BRI OPTIONS
BSI RF CARRIER
BRI S0 MAPPING
CALL COST
CALL FORWARD
CALL LOG BLOCK
CALLER ID DISPLAY
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
CARD PRE-INSTALL
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
CID TRANSLATION TABLE
CLI RINGING
COMMON BELL CONTROL
CONFERENCE GAIN
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 707
MMC: 752
MMC: 206
MMC: 319
MMC: 418
MMC: 419
MMC: 747
MMC: 424
MMC: 508
MMC: 102
MMC: 609
MMC: 119
MMC: 323
MMC: 806
MMC: 201
MMC: 202
MMC: 858
MMC: 820
MMC: 826
MMC: 705
MMC: 803
MMC: 603
MMC: 408
MMC: 412
MMC: 428
MMC: 203
MMC: 756
MMC: 207
MMC: 704
MMC:224
MMC: 801
MMC: 101
MMC: 728
MMC: 759
MMC: 204
MMC: 816
1-15
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC Name
CONFERENCE GROUP
CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
CONNECTION STATUS
COPY COS CONTENTS
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
COPY STATION USABLE
COST RATE
COSTING DIAL PLAN
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
DATE DISPLAY
DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
DISPLAY SYSTEM OPTIONS
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
EXECUTIVE STATE
EXTENSION TYPE
FAX PAIR
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
H.323 GK OPTIONS
H.323 OPTIONS
HALT PROCESSING
HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 109
MMC: 515
MMC: 854
MMC: 724
MMC: 714
MMC: 214
MMC: 889
MMC: 855
MMC: 318
MMC: 211
MMC: 417
MMC: 117
MMC: 800
MMC: 830
MMC: 125
MMC: 221
MMC: 118
MMC: 314
MMC: 434
MMC: 700
MMC: 720
MMC: 316
MMC: 433
MMC: 746
MMC: 802
MMC: 815
MMC: 300
MMC: 210
MMC: 400
MMC: 315
MMC: 222
MMC: 407
MMC: 836
MMC: 834
MMC: 810
MMC: 859
1-16
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC Name
HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
HOTEL OPERATION
HOTEL TIMER
IDLE DISPLAY
INITIALIZE PORT
IP PHONE INFORMATION
IP STATION TYPE
ISDN SERVICE TYPE
ITEM COST TABLE
KEY EXTENDER
LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS
LARGE LCD OPTIONS
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
MAINTENANCE BUSY
MGI DSP OPTIONS
MGI GROUP
MGI PARAMETERS
MGI USER
MPD/PRS SIGNAL
MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
MSN DIGIT
MY AREA CODE
NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
PHONE LANGUAGE
PHONE RING TONE
PHONE VOLUME
PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
PICKUP GROUPS
PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 710
MMC: 713
MMC: 712
MMC: 711
MMC: 853
MMC: 835
MMC: 615
MMC: 831
MMC: 616
MMC: 414
MMC: 511
MMC: 421
MMC: 718
MMC: 824
MMC: 122
MMC: 200
MMC: 512
MMC: 306
MMC: 813
MMC: 513
MMC: 719
MMC: 890
MMC: 840
MMC: 844
MMC: 220
MMC: 760
MMC: 107
MMC: 829
MMC: 120
MMC: 310
MMC: 121
MMC: 111
MMC: 114
MMC: 807
MMC: 302
MMC: 320
1-17
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC Name
PRI OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
RESET SYSTEM
ROOM COST RATE
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SET ANSWER MODE
S/T MODE
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SET ANSWER MODE
SET COUNTRY CODE
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
SIP OPTIONS
SIP STATION INFORMATION
SLI RING CADENCE
SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
SMDR OPTIONS
STATION GROUP NAME
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION LOCK
STATION NAME
STATION ON/OFF
STATION PAIR
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
STATION STATUS
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 812
MMC: 115
MMC: 837
MMC: 842
MMC: 510
MMC: 819
MMC: 725
MMC: 602
MMC: 722
MMC: 100
MMC: 104
MMC: 110
MMC: 740
MMC: 105
MMC: 106
MMC: 108
MMC: 420
MMC: 838
MMC: 818
MMC: 715
MMC: 504
MMC: 747
MMC: 415
MMC: 811
MMC: 762
MMC: 721
MMC: 103
MMC: 423
MMC: 721
MMC: 103
MMC: 614
MMC: 502
MMC: 852
MMC: 723
MMC: 841
MMC: 861
1-18
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
MMC Name
SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
SYSTEM TIMERS
SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
TAX RATE SETUP
TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
TONE CADENCE
TONE SOURCE
TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
TRUNK COS
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
TRUNK STATUS READ
TRUNK TMC GAIN
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
TX LEVEL AND GAIN
UCD AGENT ID
UCD OPTIONS
UCD STATUS SERVICE
UK LCR OPTION
VIEW MEMO NUMBER
VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
VM ALARM
VM CARD RESTART
VM DAY/NIGHT
VM HALT
VM IN/OUT
VM/AA OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC No.
MMC: 426
MMC: 401
MMC: 404
MMC: 406
MMC: 409
MMC: 436
MMC: 403
MMC: 503
MMC: 805
MMC: 717
MMC: 607
MMC: 860
MMC: 716
MMC: 113
MMC: 822
MMC: 755
MMC: 850
MMC: 706
MMC: 501
MMC: 727
MMC: 500
MMC: 761
MMC: 856
MMC: 703
MMC: 702
MMC: 709
MMC: 506
MMC: 514
MMC: 217
MMC: 405
MMC: 422
MMC: 402
MMC: 750
MMC: 758
MMC: 754
MMC: 757
MMC: 726
1-19
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
MMC Name
VMS CALL TYPE
VoIP ACCESS CODE
VoIP IP TABLE
WARNING DESTINATION
WIP INFORMATION
WLAN CONFIGURATION
WLAN IP/MAC LIST
WLAN PARAMETERS
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
Program (MMC) List by Function
Phone Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 100
MMC: 101
MMC: 102
MMC: 103
MMC: 104
MMC: 105
MMC: 106
MMC: 107
MMC: 108
MMC: 109
MMC: 110
MMC: 111
MMC: 112
MMC: 114
MMC: 115
MMC: 116
MMC: 119
Program Description
STATION LOCK
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
CALL FORWARD
SET ANSWER MODE
STATION NAME
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
KEY EXTENDER
STATION STATUS
DATE DISPLAY
STATION ON/OFF
PHONE RING TONE
ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
PHONE VOLUME
SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
ALARM AND MESSAGE
CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC No.
MMC: 413
MMC: 832
MMC: 833
MMC: 753
MMC: 846
MMC: 849
MMC: 848
MMC: 845
MMC: 847
Samsung Business Communications
1-20
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Networking Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 820
MMC: 821
MMC: 822
MMC: 823
MMC: 824
MMC: 825
MMC: 829
MMC: 830
MMC: 837
MMC: 840
MMC: 841
MMC: 844
Program Description
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
ASSIGN NETWORK COS
NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION
LAN PRINTER PARAMETER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
SIP OPTIONS
IP PHONE INFORMATIONES
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
IP STATION TYPE
VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 831
MMC: 832
MMC: 833
MMC: 834
MMC: 835
MMC: 836
Program Description
MGI PARAMETERS
VOIP ACCESS CODE
VoIP IP TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
H.323 GK OPTIONS
WLAN (Wireless LAN) Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 845
MMC: 846
MMC: 847
MMC: 848
MMC: 849
Program Description
WLAN PARAMETER
WIP INFORMATION
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
WLAN IP/MAC LIST
WLAN CONFIGURATION
Samsung Business Communications
1-21
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
LCR (Least Cost Routing) Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 710
MMC: 711
MMC: 712
MMC: 713
MMC: 763
Program Description
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
SECOND LCR
Voice Mail Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 750
MMC: 751
MMC: 752
MMC: 753
MMC: 754
MMC: 755
MMC: 756
MMC: 757
MMC: 758
MMC: 207
MMC: 215
MMC: 216
MMC: 413
MMC: 726
MMC: 730
MMC: 731
MMC: 732
MMC: 733
MMC: 735
MMC: 736
MMC: 739
Program Description
ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS
VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS
VMS CALL TYPE
VM/AA OPTIONS
AA RECORD GAIN
AA RAM CLEAR
AA TRANSLATION TABLE
AA PLAN TABLE
AA USE TABLE
AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH
ASSIGN AA MOH
VM CARD RESTART
ASSIGN MAILBOX
AUTO RECORD
WARNING DESTINATION
VM HALT
VM ALARM
ASSIGN VM MOH
VM IN/OUT
VM DAY/NIGHT
Samsung Business Communications
1-22
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
Diagnosis Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 434
MMC: 851
MMC: 852
MMC: 853
MMC: 854
MMC: 855
MMC: 890
Hotel Function
MMC Program No.
MMC: 221
MMC: 222
MMC: 433
MMC: 513
MMC: 748
MMC: 749
MMC: 760
MMC: 761
MMC: 762
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Program Description
CONNECTION STATUS
ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MAINTENANCE BUSY
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SYSTEM OPTIONS
INITIALIZE PORT
Program Description
TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
EXTENSION TYPE
COST RATE
HOTEL TIMER
COSTING DIAL PLAN
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
ITEM COST TABLE
TAX RATE SETUP
ROOM COST RATE
Samsung Business Communications
1-23
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order beginning at 100.
Summary of Programming Procedures
Please read the following carefully. It describes the basic steps required for successful programming.
1. Enter programming mode. i) Press the Transfer button. ii) Enter either 200 (for customer level) or 800 (for technician level). iii) Enter either the customer passcode or the technician passcode depending on your selection in step (ii). iv) Press dial button 1 (or use the Volume button) to enable programming mode. v) Press the Speaker button to display the program selection mode (or press the Transfer button to leave programming mode if you don’t want to continue).
2. Select a program.
Enter the MMC number you require. Or, select the MMC number with the Volume buttons and press the Speaker button.
3. Start programming.
Follow the description given for the selected MMC.
If this is the first time the system has been programmed after installation, run
MMC 812 to set the appropriate system software version for your country before doing any other programming.
2-1
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Programming Procedures
This section describes the procedure for each MMC.
[100] STATION LOCK
Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:
0
1
No
2
Type Description
UNLOCKED Unlocks a locked station.
LOCKED OUT The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED.
LOCKED ALL The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the
Hold button will light steady RED.
CONDITIONS
Check if the station lock function is disabled in MMC 301, ASSIGN STATION COS. If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 100.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
[205] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
[ALL] STN LOCK
?
[205] STN LOCK
LOCKED OUT
Samsung Business Communications
2-2
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 101
MMC 301
MMC 701
CHANGE USER PASSCODE
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-3
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE
Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to default.
Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction (call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.
Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 101.
Display shows:
2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.
3. Press Hold button to reset passcode.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:1234
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 100 STATION LOCK
Samsung Business Communications
2-4
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[102] CALL FORWARD
Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.
Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,
FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD
BUSY/NO ANSWER, which allows both of these options to be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both.
No Type
CONDITIONS y y y
When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set in ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, a destination number must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ before you can select the ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ option.
If forwarding is set to ‘OFF’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS, call forwarding cannot be set but can be cancelled. (Default: ‘OFF’)
Both ‘FORWARD’ and ‘ICM EXT FWD’ must be set to ‘ON’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN
COS CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number. If only ‘FORWARD’ is set to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers. (Default: ‘OFF’)
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-5
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 102.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 0-5 to select forward type.
OR
Press Volume button to select forward type (e.g. 1) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial destination number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select destination and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
[205] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:NONE
[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:201
[205] FORWARD
CURRENTLY SET :YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 501
MMC 502
MMC 701
MMC 722
MMC 723
ASSIGN STATION COS
SYSTEM TIMERS
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-6
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[103] SET ANSWER MODE
Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone. Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options:
No Type Description
0 RING MODE
1 AUTO ANSWER MODE After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion of the call will be Auto Answered, but the phone will ring when the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS or SEND button or lifted the handset.*
2 VOICE ANNOUNCE
The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS or SEND button or by lifting the handset.
The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS or SEND button or handset must be used to answer calls.
* To answer C.O. calls automatically, also set ON the option AUTO ANS CO in MMC 110.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL PHONES: RING
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 103.
Display shows:
2. Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select phone and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all phones.
3. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring mode and press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
[201] ANS MODE
RING MODE
[205] ANS MODE
RING MODE
[ALL] ANS MODE
?
[205] ANS MODE
VOICE ANNOUNCE
Samsung Business Communications
2-7
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-8
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[104] STATION NAME
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM
SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’ . Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing ‘A’ button toggles between upper case and lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered using these keys.
COUNT 1 2 3 4
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL *
<
Space
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
:
B
E
H
K
N
Q
>
?
U
X
=
I
L
C
F
O
R
.
,
V
Y
[
The # button can be used for the following special characters:
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \.
@
#
$
%
^
S
)
!
*
Z
]
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
5
4
5
2
3
6
7
0
1
8
9
*
Samsung Business Communications
2-9
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 104.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter the station name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button
to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] STN NAME
[205] STN NAME
_
[205] STN NAME
SAM SMITH
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-10
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[105] STATION SPEED DIAL
Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station’s personal speed dial locations.
CONDITIONS
Each station may have up to 50 locations (or bins) assigned to it in MMC 606 (Assign
Speed Block). The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each assigned phone number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dial digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
B
C
D
E
F
Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
Used to mask/unmask following digits (shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)
Used to enter name for speed dial bin (see MMC 106)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 105.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station
may be selected.
3. Dial location number.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select location and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[201] SPEED DIAL
00:
[205] SPEED DIAL
00:
[205] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
[205] SPEED DIAL
05:_
Samsung Business Communications
2-11
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter trunk access code (e.g., 9) followed by the number to be dialled (e.g., 4264100)
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
Press Hold button to clear an entry.
If an error is made, use VOLUME DOWN arrow to step back.
5. Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106 (Station Speed
Dial Name) to enter a name for speed dial.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 106
MMC 606
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
[205] SPEED DIAL
05:9-4264100_
Samsung Business Communications
2-12
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 106.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display will be as shown and a new station may be selected.
3. Dial speed dial location (e.g., 01)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through location numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter the location name using the procedure described above and press Right Soft button to
return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] SPEED NAME
00:
[205] SPEED NAME
00:
[305] SPEED NAME
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
[205] SPEED NAME
01:_
[205] SPEED NAME
01:SAM SMITH
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105
MMC 606
STATION SPEED DIAL
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
Samsung Business Communications
2-13
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[107] KEY EXTENDER
Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations. In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below.
Key Feature Extender
AB Absence
ACC
BOSS
CR
CS
DIR
DP
DS
Account code bin
Boss and Secretary
VM Call Record
UCD Call Status
Directory dial by name type
Direct Pickup
Direct Station Select
000-999
1-4
Mailbox number
UCD group number
1-3
Extension or station group number
Station number
0-5
01-99
Station group number IG In/Out of Group
MMPG
MW
Meet Me Page
Message Waiting
MS Manual Signalling
PAGE Page
PMSG
RSV
SG
SP
SPD
VG
VM
VT
0-9, *
Extension or station group number
Extension or station group number
Programmed Station Messaging
0-9
01-20
1-6
Room Status View (Hotel Application only) 1-5
Station Group
UCD Supervisor
Speed Dial
Station group number
UCD group number
Personal: 00-49
System: 500-999
SVM-800 Group Message
VM Memo
Station group number
Extension or station group number
Voice Transfer VM group number
Samsung Business Communications
2-14
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 107.
Display shows first station:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter key number (e.g., 18)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press the key to be programmed.
4. Dial extender according to above table.
System will return to step 3.
5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1
Æ
[205] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1
Æ
[205] EXT (MAST)
18:DS
Æ
[205] EXT (MAST)
18: DS
Æ DS_
[205] EXT (MAST)
18: DS
Æ DS207
If the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 720
MMC 721
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 724
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
Samsung Business Communications
2-15
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[108] STATION STATUS
This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port.
No Status Description
Chassis(1-3)/Slot(1-9)/Port(1-16)
6
9
1 TYPE
2 PICKUP GROUP
3 SGR
4 BOSS-SECR
5 PAGE
COS 1, COS 2
TENANT GROUP
None, 01-99
None, Page Zone (0-4, * )
COS (01-30) per Ring Plan (01-06)
Tenant Group Number (1 or 2)
DEFAULT DATA
PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION
TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE
PICKUP GRP: NONE
SGR: NONE
BOSS-SECR: NONE
PAGE ZONE: NONE
COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS
TENANT GRP: 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 108.
Display shows first station:
2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 0~9 to select station status type.
OR
Press Volume button to select status and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[201] STN STATUS
PORT:C1-S3-P01
[205] STN STATUS
PORT:C1-S3-P05
[205] STN STATUS
PICKUP GROUP:01
Samsung Business Communications
2-16
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 302
MMC 303
MMC 601
MMC 604
ASSIGN STATION COS
PICKUP GROUPS
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-17
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[109] DATE DISPLAY
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a per-station basis or system wide.
No
0
1
2
Mode
COUNTRY
CLOCK
DISPLAY
Description
Sets overall display format and has two options:
0 = ORIENTAL
1 = WESTERN
MM/DD DAY HH:MM
DAY DD MON HH:MM
Sets format of clock display and has two options:
0 = 12 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00
1 = 24 HOUR Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00
Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:
0 = UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR
1 = LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
COUNTRY: WESTERN
CLOCK: 12 HOUR
DISPLAY: LOWER CASE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 109.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial 0~2 to select mode.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through modes and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Volume button to scroll through formats and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
[ALL] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:?
[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
Samsung Business Communications
2-18
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-19
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[110] STATION ON/OFF
Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.
No Feature
00 AUTO HOLD
01 AUTO TIMER
Default
OFF
ON
02 HEADSET USE OFF
03 HOT KEYPAD
04 KEY TONE
05 PAGE REJOIN
06 RING PREF.
07 CALL COST
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
08 AUTO CAMPON OFF
09 AME BGM OFF
10 AME PASSCODE OFF
11 DISP SPDNAME OFF
12 CID REVW ALL ON
13 SECURE OHVA ON
Description
Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a CALL key, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call.
Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk
Line call.
When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the
ANS/RLS button or SEND and END buttons.
When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the
Speaker button.
Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on phone.
Allows you to hear the remaining part of page announcements if phone becomes free during a page.
When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.
When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration of the call.
When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to camp-on to other phones without having to press a
CAMP-ON key.
This feature selects whether a station using Answer Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting.
A BGM source must be selected for this to work.
When ON, station users who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left.
When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD display when using speed dial.
When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls that were not answered at the extension or were answered by voice mail.
When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be heard over the phone speaker.
Samsung Business Communications
2-20
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Feature Default
14 NOT CONT.CID ON
15 AUTO ANS CO
16 ENBLOCK 2LCD OFF
17 STN NO RING
OFF
OFF
Description
When OFF, the Caller ID will be displayed for the duration of the call. When ON, displays timer for duration of call (if AUTO TIMER also set on).
When ON, keyset will automatically answer outside calls through the speakerphone. For this to work, the keyset must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103. Calls to groups cannot be auto-answered.
Enables Enbloc dialling for 2-Line LCD phones. This option only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is enabled in MMC 861.
When ON, no tones will be heard when phone rings.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 110.
Display shows:
2. Dial the station number (e.g. 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all stations
3. Dial option number from above list (e.g. 03
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.
Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF
[205] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF
[205] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :ON
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :OFF
Samsung Business Communications
2-21
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 701
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-22
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[111] PHONE RING TONE
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.
Eight ring tones are available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.
DEFAULT DATA
FREQUENCY: 5
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 111.
Display shows:
2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations
3. Dial 1~8 to select ring tone.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
[205] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
[ALL] RING TONE
SELECTION ?
[205] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 114
MMC 318
PHONE VOLUME
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Samsung Business Communications
2-23
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Station Pair assignments (MMC 740) the alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station.
Description No Type
0 NOTSET
1 TODAY
2 DAILY
Alarm once only
Alarm daily at set time
DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 112.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.
3. Dial 1~3 to select alarm (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm and press Right Soft button.
4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
5. Dial entry from above list for alarm type (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and press
Right Soft button to move cursor and return to step 2.
[201] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:1300
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:1300
ÆDAILY
Samsung Business Communications
2-24
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 116 ALARM AND MESSAGE
Samsung Business Communications
2-25
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER
Used to enter memos (up to 13 characters) on a station. Up to three memos can be entered, depending on your system. MMC 116 (Alarm and Message) can be programmed to remind the keyset user to read the memo(s).
ENTER CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTER CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 113.
Display shows:
2. Dial the keyset number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press VOLUME keys to select station and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
3. Dial memo number (1–3)
OR
Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
4. Enter memo via dial keypad.
[201] VIEW MEMO
1:
[205] VIEW MEMO
1:
[205] VIEW MEMO
1:_
[205] VIEW MEMO
1:CALL TOM
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-26
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[114] PHONE VOLUME
Allows the system administrator to set the ring volume, off-hook ring volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page volume for any or all phones. Station users can set their own phones if required.
No
0
1
2
3
4
5
Type Description
RING VOLUME This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
OFF-RING VOL This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
HANDSET VOL This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.
There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
SPEAKER VOL This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
BGM VOLUME This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
DEFAULT DATA
RING VOLUME: 4
OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4
HANDSET VOLUME: 4
SPEAKER VOLUME: 13
BGM VOLUME: 13
PAGE VOLUME: 13
Samsung Business Communications
2-27
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 114.
Display shows:
2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)
3. Dial volume type (e.g. 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select volume type and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor
4. Press Volume button to select volume. (You will hear a brief tone for the volume you select)
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
[205] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
[205] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL :13
[205] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL :08
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-28
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones.
There are 20 messages (01-20) available. The last five message can be modified by each phone user.
CONDITIONS
These messages are as set up in MMC 715, PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE.
DEFAULT DATA
NO MESSAGES SELECTED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 115.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial message number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Dial 00 to cancel an existing message
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
[205] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
[ALL] PGMMSG(??)
[205] PGMMSG(05)
PAGE ME
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 715
MMC 722
MMC 723
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-29
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm.
The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded.
Description No Type
0 NOTSET
1 TODAY
2 DAILY
Alarm once only
Alarm daily at set time
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 116.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial 1~3 to select alarm (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM REM(1)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
[ALL] ALM REM(1)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM REM(2)
HHMM:
ÆNOTSET
Samsung Business Communications
2-30
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
Display will automatically advance to step 5.
5. Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type.
(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
6. Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 112 ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
[205] ALM REM(2)
HHMM:1300
ÆNOTSET
[205] ALM REM
HHMM:1300
ÆDAILY
[205] ALM REM
Meeting
Samsung Business Communications
2-31
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any station. One station can use up to 10 text messages.
CONDITIONS
Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically allowed.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
BLANK MESSAGE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 117.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 01~10 to select message.
OR
Press Volume button to select message and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] TXTMSG(01)
Blank Message
[205] TXTMSG(01)
Blank Message
[205] TXTMSG(02)
Blank Message
[205] TXTMSG(02)
SAME TIME
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 611 ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
Samsung Business Communications
2-32
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[118] CONFERENCE GROUP
Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station. A station is allowed up to five conference groups, and each group can include 4 members
(excluding the station itself). Names can be allocated to groups.
Conference members can be other stations, station groups, and external telephone numbers
(which must include the outgoing access code).
CONDITIONS
Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here. Large LCD phones are automatically set to use conference groups.
ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 118.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1~5 to select group.
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member.
OR
Press Volume button to select name or member and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
5. Enter conference member dial number and press Right Soft button to return to step 4.
[201] GRP(1)NAME
[205] GRP(1)NAME
[205] GRP(1)NAME
[205] GRP(1)MBR1
NONE
[205] GRP(1)MBR1
9-2794296
Samsung Business Communications
2-33
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 612 ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
Samsung Business Communications
2-34
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY
Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per-station basis.
Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:
No Type
0 NO DISPLAY
1 NUMBER FIRST
2 NAME FIRST
Description
No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.
The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will be displayed first.
The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.
In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the
CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide names.
DEFAULT DATA
NUMBER FIRST
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 119.
Display shows first station:
2. Enter station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right
Soft button
OR
Select all stations
3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2 (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
[205] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
[ALL] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
[205] CID DISP
NAME FIRST
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312
MMC 608
MMC 728
ALLOW CALLER ID
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
CID TRANSLATION TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-35
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS
Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones.
No Option
1 DS KEY DISPLAY
Description
Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on LCD when idle
Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for ‘DS’ keys on LCD
Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK or OVERLAP
SOFT MENU FIRST
If selected, features assigned to keys are displayed when
SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.
4 CALENDAR
AOM KEY FIRST
If selected, extensions assigned to keys are displayed when
SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.
Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR screen on LCD when idle
Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen (01~99, PREV POSI-
TION)
DEFAULT DATA
IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR
DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER
DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 120.
Display shows:
2. Enter station number (e.g., 203)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Select all stations and press the Right Soft button.
3. Dial the option number from above list (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select the option and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
[201] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
[203] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
[ALL] IDLE DISP
CALENDER
[203] DS KEY DSP
TEL NUMBER
Samsung Business Communications
2-36
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Press Volume button to select display type and press Right
Soft button.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[203] DS KEY DSP
EXT NAME
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY
Samsung Business Communications
2-37
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[121] PHONE LANGUAGE
Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user’s own language.
No. Language
00 ENGLISH
01 GERMAN
02 PORTUGAL
03 NORSK
04 DANISH
05 DUTCH
No. Language
06 ITALY
07 SPANISH
08 SWEDISH
09 SPANISH/USA
10 FRENCH/CANADA
11 FINNISH
DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 121.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial 00~10 for language required.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
[205] LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
[ALL] LANGUAGE
?
[205] LANGUAGE
GERMAN
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-38
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS (fastest) and 1 sec (slowest).
This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package.
DEFAULT DATA
03 (0300 mS)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 122.
Display shows first station:
2. Enter station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through stations and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
[201] CALL SPEED
03
Æ
[205] CALL SPEED
03
Æ
Select all stations
3. Dial speed option (03~10)
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[205] CALL SPEED
03
Æ04
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-39
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[125] EXECUTIVE STATE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station’s options, as follows.
No Option Description
0 EXEC STATE When working with EASYSET, the state of the executive station can be displayed (e.g. IN A MEETING)
If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(IN), EASYSET displays this message. 1 STATE(IN)
2 STATE(OUT) If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(OUT), EASYSET displays this message.
3 ANSWER MODE Set answer mode for executive/secretary calling: Ring, Auto Answer,
Voice Announce. (Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer modes.)
ENTER CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTER CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 125.
Display shows:
2. Dial executive station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 0~3 to select option (see table above).
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
[201] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
[205] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
[205] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
4. Dial 0~9 to select state (e.g. IN A MEETING)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[205] EXEC STATE
IN A MEETING
Samsung Business Communications
2-40
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-41
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
Used to open (enable) and close (disable) customer-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT
PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC
802, Customer Access MMC Number.
No Mode
0
1
DISABLE
ENABLE
Description
Open (enable) customer-level programming
Close (disable) customer-level programming
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 200.
Display shows:
Incorrect code shows.
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
DISABLE
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE ERROR
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
ENABLE
3. Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE or DISABLE and press Right Soft button.
OR
Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.
4. Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level and press Volume button to select MMC.
OR
Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button to enter MMC.
5. Press Transfer button to exit.
201:CUS.PASSCODE
SELECT PROG. ID
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 201
MMC 501
MMC 802
CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
Samsung Business Communications
2-42
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming, from its current value.
CONDITIONS y y
The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.
The current (old) passcode is required for this MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
PASSCODE: 1234
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 201.
2. Enter new passcode via dial keypad.
(maximum four digits)
3. Verify new passcode via dial keypad.
Passcode verified (go to step 4)
OR
Passcode failure (return to step 2)
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:****
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :****
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-43
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
Used to change the passcodes for the following features.
No Feature Description
0
1
RING PLAN
DISA ALARM
The passcode required to place the system in different ring plans (RP) or change the ring time override (RTO).
The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded.
2
5
ALARM CLR
DELETE
The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnection of BI-PMS SIO. (Hotel Application only).
This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill.
(Hotel Application only).
6 WLAN REGST The passcode required to register a WIP phone.
CONDITIONS y y
The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.
The current passcode is required for this MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN: 0000
DISA ALARM: 5678
ALARM CLR: 8765
DECT REGST: 4321
DELETE: 9999
WLAN REGST: 0000
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 202.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry.
3. Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad.
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN :0000
CHANGE PASSCODE
DISA ALARM :5678
CHANGE PASSCODE
DISA ALARM :9999
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
Continue to change other passcodes.
Samsung Business Communications
2-44
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 410
MMC 507
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-45
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE
Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer (UA) key is pressed or the
UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by the directory number (DN) entered.
Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one item (e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four zone codes must be created.
Ringing Device
NONE (NO UA)
Description
No phone number
STN GROUP
RING PAGE
COMMON BELL
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
Station group number
External speaker phone number
Common bell phone number
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 203.
Display shows current assignment:
2. Dial DN of UA device (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume buttons to scroll through available devices.
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
ASSIGN UA PORT
NONE-NO UA
ASSIGN UA PORT
205 -STATION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 204
MMC 601
MMC 605
COMMON BELL CONTROL
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-46
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL
Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.
CONDITIONS y When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to a station group so that all stations in the group ring.
DEFAULT DATA
CONTINUOUS
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 204.
Display shows current setting:
2. Dial common bell number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of common bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[3801]COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
[3801]COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
[3802]COM. BELL
INTERRUPTED
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203
MMC 601
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-47
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL
Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS module. (Each MIS module provides one loud bell port.) The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated station.
CONDITIONS
Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell, not a station group.
DEFAULT DATA
UNASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 205.
Display shows current setting.
2. Dial loud bell number (e.g., 3902)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter station number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[3901]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:NONE
[3902]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:NONE
[3902]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:201
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-48
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[206] BARGE-IN TYPE
Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.
No Type
0 NO BARGE-IN
1 WITH TONE
2 WITHOUT TONE
Description
Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in status.
Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station barged-in on.
Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the station barged-in on and the barging-in station will be muted.
DEFAULT DATA
NO BARGE-IN
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 206.
Display shows:
2. Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select barge-in type and press Right Soft button.
BARGE IN TYPE
NO BARGE IN
BARGE IN TYPE
WITHOUT TONE
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 701
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-49
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA. VMAA ports receive digits designated in MMC 726 (VM/AA Options) and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call. Only SLI modules, not keyset daughterboards, support disconnect signal. Do not make VMAA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VMAA ports have the equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones.
This MMC is not used to assign voice mail module ports. Voice mail module ports are assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM-
400 or SVMi-20E module.
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL PORT
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 207.
[209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1 or 0 to select port type.
(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL)
OR
Press Volume button to select type and press
Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[205] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
[205] VMAA PORT
VMAA PORT
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-50
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE
Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.
No Type Description
0 ICM RING
1 CO RING
Follows normal SLI ring cadence.
Follows Trunk line ring cadence.
2 DATA RING Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off-hook ring.
DEFAULT DATA
ICM RING
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 208.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select type and press
Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[209] RING TYPE
ICM RING
[205] RING TYPE
ICM RING
[205] RING TYPE
DATA RING
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-51
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
Designates to which phone an add-on module (AOM) is assigned. There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. A maximum of four AOMs can be assigned to a keyset.
CONDITIONS
An AOM cannot be designated as Master. If no AOM exists in the system, the ‘AOM NOT
EXIST’ message is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
MASTER:NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 209.
Display shows first AOM:
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers and use Soft buttons to move cursor.
3. Enter station number (e.g., 301)
OR
Use Volume button for selection of stations and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:201
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-52
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per-tenant basis. Each system option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle ON/OFF.
No Option
00 DISA PSWD
01 LCR ENABLE
05 DISA MOH
06 TRANSFER
MOH
09 ALARM MOH
12 CONF TONE
Default
ON
OFF
03 PERI UCD RPT OFF
04 CID CODE INS OFF
OFF
OFF
08 DID BSY ROUT OFF
ON
OFF
13 RECALL PIKUP ON
Description
When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension number and DISA password are not required and the caller has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.
This option determines whether the system will or will not route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR routing tables
Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics data on a per-UCD group basis to print out on the IO port which has been set as PERI UCD in real time (every 3~99 seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and manipulated by an external package or third party provided software.
When ON, the system will insert the country code when receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID display callback feature.
When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the caller dials a digit.
When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the call is answered by an internal party.
When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk, if CW is set to
OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the call will re-route to the operator.
When ON, a station user answering an alarm ring will hear station MOH instead of dial tone.
When ON, provides conference tone. (Available in Australia and Italy only.)
When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using
Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.
This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station.
Samsung Business Communications
2-53
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Default
14 ICM EXT FWD OFF
16 DID ERR TONE OFF
18 KTS DISC ALM OFF
19 OFF HOOK ALM OFF
20 SL SELF RING OFF
21 SGR INC BUSY OFF
24 TRANSFER
CANCEL
26 RECALL DISC
29 ARD TONE CHK ON
30 VPN ENABLE
31 IN TOLL CHK
32 ISDN
PROGCON
33 INCLUDE VAT
36 DSS KEY DPU
OFF
OFF
OFF
37 BEGN DGT DSP OFF
FACC
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External programmed and set.
This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number is received.
When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone disconnects or connects.
When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone stays off-hook longer than this timer.
When ON, generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line phone dials itself and hangs up (self test).
When ON, generates busy tone when all station group members are busy for a group call. This does not work for station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set.
When OFF, a single line phone can handle 2 calls simultaneously using the hook-flash to toggle between them. When
ON, a single line phone can connect to the second call, but pressing the hook-flash will not toggle between the two calls it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single line phone to the first call.
When ON, the system disconnects a transferred call when it recalls.
When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office, it returns to auto redial state.
When ON, VPN is enabled. (Australia only.)
When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict incoming calls.
When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS message from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without CON-
NECT message.
When ON, an “Inclusive VAT of” line is printed on Hotel invoices (Hotel Application).
When ON, pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing station
When ON, and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled, then only the first 11 dialled digits are shown on the phone display.
When OFF, phone users cannot use one-touch account code (ACC) key.
Samsung Business Communications
2-54
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Default
39 SGR ALL OUT OFF
40 CHAIN FWD
43 NTWK
AUTOTMR
44 USE EURO
COD
OFF
46 PERI UCD SIO OFF
47 AUTO
CLEANED
ON
41 TRK MONITER OFF
42 VOIP MFRALOC OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
48 REDIAL REVW OFF
50 ISDN KEYFAC
52 CHK SPV TRK
BUSY
OFF
OFF
OFF
54 ORG DIAL LOG OFF
Description
When ON, the last remaining station group member can leave a group.
If ON, an incoming call forwarded from a station to another station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second station, if the latter is set for ‘forward to voice mail’. If this option is OFF, the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox of the first station.
If ON, the system will monitor the trunk supervision signalling. That is, if a disconnection signal is received from the exchange, the call will be cleared and the extension will go back on hook.
If ON, this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem caller breaking out on another trunk group.
If OFF, the call timer in the phone display will not function if the call is from a network connection (Q-SIG).
If ON, the unit of currency shown in call displays and on
SMDR reports will be Euros (€). (This will also display on
Hotel Application invoices.)
When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in
Hotel operation.
When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO port.
Normally, when a room is checked-out, the room status is changed to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead. (Hotel
Application.)
When ON, the CALL LOG review will appear when the Redial or LNR button is pressed.
If ON, allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the exchange to invoke network features.
When ON, if trunks don’t have the supervision feature they cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised conferences.
When ON, and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set for forward busy, if a preset no answer destination is available the call is re-routed to that destination.
When ON, all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones. When OFF, invalid dialling such as dialling of a non-existent station number will not be saved in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones.
Samsung Business Communications
2-55
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Default
55 TIE TRSF RCL ON
56 VOIP REALRBT OFF
57 CO-CO TM ALL OFF
60 SMDR
AUT2ACC
OFF
64 IPNW REAL RB OFF
MOH
69 DISA NO ACT
70 ICM
AUTOHOLD
OFF
67 TRSF VT KEY ON
68 PAIR NO RING OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
When ON and a trunk call transferred to the tie line is not answered within the transfer recall time, the call recalls to the original transferring station.
When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.
When ON, this timer prevents system trunk calls from locking up.
When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in
ACCOUNT field of SMDR.
When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.
When ON, an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer (MMC 503) expires and the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered, it is disconnected. (To use this feature, MMC 400 AUTO AN-
SWER option must set to ON.)
When ON, works like the VT key when the user transfers the call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key.
When ON, if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and does not ring the free paired extension.
When ON, a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC
406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires.
When ON, will allow internal calls to be put on hold automatically when another call is taken.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 210.
Display shows:
2. Dial option number (e.g., 00)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :OFF
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :OFF
Samsung Business Communications
2-56
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
TEN. ON AND OFF
DISA PSWD :ON
Samsung Business Communications
2-57
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed.
If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used. Available ring plans are 1 to 6.
DEFAULT DATA
STATION GROUP: 500
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 211.
Display shows first door phone:
2. Dial door phone number (e.g., 230)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through door phone numbers and use the Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select All door ring.
3. Enter new ring plan number selection via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[229] DOOR RING
1:500 2:500
[230] DOOR RING
1:500 2:500
[ALL] DOOR RING
1:500 2:500
[250] DOOR RING
1:301 2:500
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-58
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification.
CONDITIONS y y
A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.
The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: 500
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 214.
Display shows:
2. Enter valid destination number for ring plan.
(e.g., 217)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Enter valid destination number for another ring plan (e.g., 249)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
DISA ALARM RING
1:500 2:500
DISA ALARM RING
1:217 2:500
DISA ALARM RING
1:217 2:249
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-59
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be printed on demand, or every hour, or at a programmed time each day, or for up to three separately-timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.
When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:
No Option Description
0 PRINT AND CLEAR A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.
1 PRINTOUT ONLY A report is printed and all the totals are saved.
2 CANCEL PRINTOUT Cancels printout.
When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:
No Option Description
0 AUTO PRINT OFF Automatic print feature is disabled.
1 DAILY A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are reset to ‘0’
2 EVERY HOUR
SHIFT
A report will be printed every hour
Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report traffic within different shifts. A report is printed at the end of each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’
When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING
D & T.
If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.
CONDITIONS
If this function is required in an OfficeServ 7000 series system with an MCP card, you must connect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP/IP function.
DEFAULT DATA
AUTO PRINT OFF
Samsung Business Communications
2-60
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 217.
Display shows:
2. Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
3. If AUTO selected, dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4. Enter daily report time (HHMM)
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
TRAFFIC REPORT
MANUAL PRINTOUT
TRAFFIC REPORT
AUTO PRINT OPTN
TRAFFIC REPORT
DAILY HHMM:2359
TRAFFIC REPORT
DAILY HHMM:2200
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 829 LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS
Samsung Business Communications
2-61
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE
Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port. Service consists of BC
(Bearer Capability) and HLC (High Layer Capability).
No Type
0 VOICE
1 FAX 3
2 AUDIO 3.1
3 MODEM
DEFAULT DATA
VOICE
Description
G3 FAX service
3.1 kHz Audio service
MODEM service
BC
Speech
3.1 kHz Audio
3.1 kHz Audio
3.1 kHz Audio
HLC
-
FAX G2/G3
None
Telephony
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 220.
Display shows:
2. Enter the station number (e.g., 210)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.
3. Select service type (0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
[209] ISDN SVC
VOICE
[210] ISDN SVC
VOICE
[210] ISDN SVC
AUDIO 3.1
Samsung Business Communications
2-62
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[221] EXTENSION TYPE
This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use. Each phone can be designated as one of five types (see table). These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type.
No Type Description
0
1
NORMAL STATION
GUEST SMOKING
This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as
VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.
When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a smoking room.
2 GUEST NO SMOKING When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room status and check-in features as a non-smoking room.
3 MEETING ROOM Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists.
4 ADMINISTRATOR
5 FAX STATION
Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel features (check in, etc.)
When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a
‘pair’ station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO
SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222.
CONDITIONS
This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL STATION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 221.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 214)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
[201] PHONE USE
NORMAL STATION
[214] PHONE USE
NORMAL STATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-63
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
3. Dial 0 - 5 to select station type.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 813 HOTEL OPERATION
[214] PHONE USE
GUEST NO SMOKING
Samsung Business Communications
2-64
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[222] FAX PAIR
Enables a guest room to have a normal phone line and fax line simultaneously. Only a
Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
CONDITIONS
This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING, GUEST NO
SMOKING in MMC 222, and if not, display “ROOM NOT EXIST”:
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 222.
Display shows:
2. Dial guest extension number (e.g. 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
3. Dial fax station number (e.g. 301)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 221
MMC 813
EXTENSION TYPE
HOTEL OPERATION
[201] FAX PAIR
NONE
[205] FAX PAIR
NONE
[205] FAX PAIR
301
Samsung Business Communications
2-65
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[224] AUDIO PROMPT
This feature requires an SVMi-20E module to be installed in the system. The system will play a selected recorded prompt (1–9999) when a call is answered. Prompts 1005–9999 can be customised in programming; 1–1004 are default system prompts and should not be changed.
This MMC has the following options.
No
0
Option
STN GROUP
1
2
3
PROMPT NO
GROUP BUSY
RBT SOURCE
Description
Determines which VMS UCD group or SVMi-20E port will be connected when a call is answered.
Determines which prompt will be played when a call is answered.
This destination is a recorded message 1-9999.
Determines which tone source will be connected when all VMS UCD group members are busy. This destination can be NONE, TONE or external music on hold.
If NONE is set then dial tone is connected; if TONE is set then hold tone is connected.
Determines which VMS UCD group or port is used as the Ring
Back Tone (RBT) source.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
STN GROUP: NONE
PROMPT NO: 0001
GROUP BUSY: NONE
RBT SOURCE: NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 224.
Display shows:
2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select (e.g. 0).
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
AUDIO PROMPT
STN GROUP :NONE
AUDIO PROMPT
STN GROUP :NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-66
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Enter the station group number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
AUDIO PROMPT
STN GROUP :578
Samsung Business Communications
2-67
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
Allows the following features to be enabled/disabled on a per-station basis.
No Option Default Description
01 MICROPHONE ON
02 OFF-HOOK RING ON
03 SMDR PRINT ON
04 TGR ADV.TONE ON
05 VMAA FORWARD ON
07 NGT PASSCODE ON
08 INTRCOM SMDR OFF
09 FWD DELAY USE OFF
11 FORWARD OVRD OFF
12 RECL TO OPER OFF
13 SLT LP OPEN OFF
15 CID TO SLT OFF
22 NO RCL FLASH OFF group by dialling its directory number (DN). This selection should be turned off when using LCR.
Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode.
Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.
When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.
This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from hold or park.
When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be heard each time LCR advances to the next route.
This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be forwarded to voice mail: ON, permits forward to voice mail; OFF, no forward to voice mail.
When ON, the steps verifying the ring plan passcode will be added in Ring Plan change.
When set to OFF, the station will not print intercom calls on SMDR.
When ON, calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires even when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called party extension.
When set to ON and the station calls another station which has forwarding set, the call will not forward.
When set to ON, if the station transfers a call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will recall to the operator instead of the station.
When ON, SLI port receives real disconnect signal instead of busy or error tone. (VMAA or DATA ports always receive real disconnect signal.)
When a MIS module is installed and this option is set to
ON, the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs.
When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is pressed, a recall signal will not be sent to the system.
Samsung Business Communications
2-68
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 300.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station.
OR
Select all stations and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Press Volume button to select feature and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[205] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :OFF
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING:
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-69
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[301] ASSIGN STATION COS
Used to assign a class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service
(defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents) and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan
Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. The default is COS 01.
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLANS 1-6: 01
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 301.
Display shows first station:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
[201] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[205] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[ALL] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[205] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[205] STN COS
1:05 2:01 3:01
Samsung Business Communications
2-70
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Enter the next ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to previous step.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
[205] STN COS
1:05 2:01 3:01
Samsung Business Communications
2-71
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[302] PICKUP GROUPS
Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 99 pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time.
DEFAULT DATA
NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 302.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to select station number and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial pickup group number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select group number.
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to enter more stations.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:NONE
[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:NONE
[ALL] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:??
[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:05
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 722
MMC 723
KEY EXTENDER
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-72
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and including four BOSS stations.
CONDITIONS y y y
A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s).
A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.
A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
F BUTTON Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 303.
Display shows:
2. Dial BOSS station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.
3. Dial SECRETARY number (1, 2, 3 or 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select number and press
Right Soft button.
4. Dial SECRETARY station number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select station.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to enter more SECR numbers.
5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and continue entries.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
BOSS STN:NONE
SECR 1:NONE
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:201
BOSS STN:205
SECR 2:202
Samsung Business Communications
2-73
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-74
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through C.O. lines or to answer calls for C.O. lines (on a station and trunk use group basis).
CONDITIONS y Stations are set within use group numbers 001~300 and trunks are set within use group numbers 301~500 in MMC 614, ASSIGN USE GROUP. y If a station group is set to NO Dial, stations cannot place calls on that trunk group. y If a station group is set to NO Answer, stations cannot answer incoming calls on that trunk group.
Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option.
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ANS: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 304.
Display shows:
2. Dial the station use group number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select station use group and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all station use groups.
3. Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 304)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk use group and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunk use groups.
4. Press Volume button to select YES/NO option.
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.
(001) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(005) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(005) USE (ALL)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:NO ANS:YES
Samsung Business Communications
2-75
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option.
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 316
MMC 614
COPY STATION USABLE
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:NO ANS:YES
Samsung Business Communications
2-76
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE
This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected: the assignment of account codes with verification, account codes without verification and authorization codes (or none of these) on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification.
No Type
0 NONE
1 AUTHORIZE CODE
Description
2
3
ACCT VERIFIED
ACCT NO VERIFIED
Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table (MMC
707).
Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the AC-
COUNT CODE Table (MMC 708).
Forces user to enter an Account code which is not verified.
User can enter any code up to 12 digits (including ∗ and #).
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 305.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial a feature option 0-3 (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
[201] FORCD CODE
NONE
[205] FORCD CODE
NONE
[205] FORCD CODE
ACCT VERIFIED
MMC 707
MMC 708
AUTHORIZATION CODE
ACCOUNT CODE
Samsung Business Communications
2-77
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
Allows a station to make a predetermined call, similar to a ring-down circuit, upon the expiration of a timer (see MMC 502, STATION TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer).
CONDITIONS y The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an external number. y There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers. The access code for trunk or trunk group access (e.g. 0 or 9) is not counted as part of the 18.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
B
C
D
E
ACTION
Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 306.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter the hot line destination, a station or trunk ID (e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of
18 outgoing digits after the access code for the CO call (see above list of options if needed)
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 502
[201] HOT LINE
NONE
[205] HOT LINE
NONE
[205] HOT LINE
9-1305P4264100_
STATION-WIDE TIMERS (OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER)
Samsung Business Communications
2-78
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
Assigns a background music source to phones. There is one internal music source and two additional external music sources are provided if a MIS module is installed in the system. A
3-chassis system has six external music sources. The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371 (internal) , 372~ 377 (external).
CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of the module. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or if a sound source is not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source, music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 308.
Display shows current setting.
2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Enter source number (e.g., 3761)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
[ALL] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:?
[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:3761
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 309
MMC 408
ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
Samsung Business Communications
2-79
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones. There is one internal music source and two additional external music sources are provided if a MIS module is installed in the system.
The default directory numbers for the music sources are 3761 (internal) and 3762-3763
(external).
CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the external sound source of the MIS module.
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 309.
Display shows current setting:
2. Dial phone number (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Enter source number (e.g., 3761)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:NONE
[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:NONE
[ALL] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:?
[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:3761
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 308
MMC 408
ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
Samsung Business Communications
2-80
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to ‘trunk advance’ up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.
DEFAULT DATA
LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 310.
Display shows:
2. Dial station/trunk number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial 1-8 to select class type (e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select class type and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1
[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1
[ALL] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS ?
[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 3
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING:
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-81
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[312] ALLOW CALLER ID
Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from, or displayed at, LCD phones.
Option
RCV
SND
DEFAULT DATA
Description
Set whether to display CID.
Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.
RCV: YES
SND: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 312.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations
3. Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option.
OR
Press Volume button to select receive option and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option.
OR
Press Volume button to select send option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
[201] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
[ALL] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
Samsung Business Communications
2-82
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time: calls can be disconnected or the user can receive ‘confirm tone’ (refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501).
No Type Description
0 NONE
1 CONFIRM TONE Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time
2 DISCONNECT Call is disconnected.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 314.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial a feature option 0-2.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
[201] CO CONFIRM
NONE
[205] CO CONFIRM
NONE
[ALL] CO CONFIRM
NONE
[205] CO CONFIRM
CONFIRM TONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-83
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
Allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar phones in the system without hardware changes. All the button settings, features, etc. for a phone can be copied to another. The user can then relocate to the new station and work as normal. Refer to the tables (below) listing which phones/AOMs can be exchanged.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 315.
Display shows:
2. Enter number of original station (e.g., 202)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter second station number (e.g., 210)
Press Right Soft button to enter data.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
SET RELOCATION
EXT_ EXT
SET RELOCATION
EXT202 EXT_
SET RELOCATE
EXT202 EXT210
SET RELOCATION
EXT_ EXT
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Exchange Allowed Table (1)
Add-On
Modules
48B
64B
48B 64B
YES YES
YES YES
Samsung Business Communications
2-84
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Exchange
Allowed
Table (2)
SLT
SLT
(Analogue)
YES
2100B 5007S
5000/5100 Series Digital Keysets (DS)
5014S 5038S 5014D 5021D 5012L 5012LE 5014D 5021D
5000/5100 Series IP Keysets (ITP)
5012L
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5107S 5114D 5121D 5112L
Soft-
Phone
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
2100B
NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
DS-5007S
DS-5014S
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
DS-5038S
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
DS-5014D
DS-5021D
DS-5012L
DS-5012LE
ITP-5014D
ITP-5021D
ITP-5012L
ITP-5107S
ITP-5114D
ITP-5121D
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO YES 1 NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES NO YES 1 NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES
YES 1 NO
YES
YES NO NO NO NO
YES 2 NO NO YES
YES 3 YES NO NO YES
YES
YES
NO NO
NO NO
ITP-5112L
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES YES
SoftPhone
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES YES
1 – Set Relocation can only be performed from the ITP-5107S. 2 – Set Relocation can only be performed from the ITP-5114D. 3 – Set Relocation can only be performed from the ITP-5121D
2-84
Samsung Business Communications
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[316] COPY STATION USABLE
Provides a tool for copying station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station user group to another. This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use groups.
Use groups are set up in MMC 614.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 316.
Display shows:
2. Enter station use group number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter station use group number to copy from.
Cursor returns to step 2.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
(001)COPY USABLE
FROM:NONE
(005)COPY USABLE
FROM:NONE
(005)COPY USABLE
FROM:003
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304
MMC 614
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-85
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls to stations in other use groups (within the same tenant).
Use groups are set up in MMC 614.
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 317.
Display shows:
2. Dial the first station use group number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all station use groups.
3. Dial the second station use group number (e.g., 004)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO (NO means first group cannot dial second group)
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
(001) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
(005) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
(ALL) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
(005) USE (004)
DIAL:YES
(005) USE (004)
DIAL:NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-86
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that keyset. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs.
There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option (default) for keysets.
There are five cadences and a Follow Station option (default) for SLTs. See table, below.
It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue.
If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.
There are nine priority levels: level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest.
Option No Description
TONE
Option
CADENCE
Option
Calls will ring with the keyset user’s choice of ring frequency.
1~8 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency.
Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
1 Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring cadence.
2
3
4
5
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence.
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring cadence.
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring cadence.
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring cadence.
CONDITIONS y y
Digital phone (keyset) rings are distinguished by their tone. If the T (TONE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the normal setting in MMC 111, PHONE RING TONE, for the receiving station. If T is set to 1-8, the bell rings according to the designated ring tone.
SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the C (CADENCE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the interval set in
MMC 510, SLI RING CADENCE, for each calling station type. If C is set to 1-5, the bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type.
Samsung Business Communications
2-87
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
T: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)
C: NO (FOLLOW STATION SETTING)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 318.
Display shows first station:
2. Dial trunk or station number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk or station and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1-8 to select ring tone.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring cadence and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Enter priority level via dial keypad.
(1-9 or NO)
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] RING TONE
T:NO C:NO PRI:NO
[705] RING TONE
T:NO C:NO PRI:NO
[705] RING TONE
T:5 C:NO PRI:NO
[705] RING TONE
T:5 C:3 PRI:NO
[705] RING TONE
T:5 C:3 PRI:NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111
MMC 510
PHONE RING TONE
SLI RING CADENCE
Samsung Business Communications
2-88
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[319] BRANCH GROUP
Assign stations to branch groups. There is a maximum of four branch groups. When a C.O. line is ringing at a station, other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the incoming call by going off hook.
This MMC is currently not valid in the UK/EU.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION
1. Press Transfer button and enter 319.
Display shows.
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205).
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial a branch group number (01-04).
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
DISPLAY
[201] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:NONE
[205] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:NONE
[ALL] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:??
[205] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:04
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-89
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer (FNA) to each station on the system. These destinations may be the same or different for each station. The preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different
FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more be in effect. Preset FNA time follows the station ‘NO ANS FWD’ timer (MMC 502).
Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call.
No
0
1
2
Type
INT
EXT
BOTH
Description
Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls.
Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls.
Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls.
If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON, the forward busy follows this feature.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 320.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Dial valid number via keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to select call type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[201] PRESET FNA
NONE OPT:BOTH
[205] PRESET FNA
NONE OPT:BOTH
[ALL] PRESET FNA
NONE OPT:BOTH
[205] PRESET FNA
202 OPT:BOTH
Samsung Business Communications
2-90
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Dial call type 0, 1 or 2 (e.g. 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 CALL FORWARD
[205] PRESET FNA
202 OPT:EXT
Samsung Business Communications
2-91
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER
Allows a number up to16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call. There are four tables for the system. If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the trunk entered in MMC 405, TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER, for the Calling Party Number.
DEFAULT DATA
EMPTY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 323.
Display shows:
2. Dial extension or trunk number (e.g., 230)
OR
Press Volume button to select extension and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Dial table number.
OR
Press Volume button to select table number and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
4. Enter the Calling Party Number.
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling
Party Numbers.
OR
Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk and Calling Party Numbers.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] SEND CLIP
1:
[230] SEND CLIP
1:
[230] SEND CLIP
2:
[230] SEND CLIP
2:3055922900
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419
MMC 420
MMC 834
BRI OPTIONS
PRI OPTIONS
H.323 OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-92
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
Assigns several options (listed below) on a per-trunk basis.
No Option
0 1A2 EMULATION
1 TRUNK INC DND
2 TRUNK FORWARD ON
3 LCR ALLOW
6 EFWD EXT CLI
7 REPEAT CLI
8 TONECHK DISC
9 AUTO ANSWER
Default
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Description
When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations can participate in a conversation on this trunk by pressing the trunk key.
When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL) will ring at that station if the station is in DND.
When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a ringing stations call forwarding.
Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a trunk is accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number
(e.g. 701).
This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or
Received CLI from Trunk)
This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk)
When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone. (To use this feature, the
LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to
ENABLE.)
When this option is set to ON, Auto Answer mode can be assigned on a per-trunk basis.
DEFAULT DATA
1A2 EMULATE : OFF
TRK INC. DND : OFF
TRK FORWARD : ON
EFWD EXT CLI : ON
REPEAT CLI : ON
Samsung Business Communications
2-93
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 400.
Display show:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk.
OR
Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move cursor to options.
3. Dial option number from above list
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
[704] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
[ALL] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:?
[704] TRK ON/OFF
TRK FORWARD:ON
[704] TRK ON/OFF
TRK FORWARD:OFF
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-94
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
Used to select the mode of the trunk lines: CO LINE or PBX LINE. If PBX mode is chosen, this allows PBX access codes to be recognised, thus allowing more complete toll restriction
(call barring). This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: CO LINE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 401.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move.
OR
Select all trunks
3. Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO (e.g. 1)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] PBX LINE
CO LINE
[704] PBX LINE
CO LINE
[ALL] PBX LINE
?
[704] PBX LINE
PBX LINE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-95
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE
Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line. There are two options:
No Type Description
1 DIAL PULSE TYPE
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: DTMF
Dial Pulse
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 402.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501
MMC 503
SYSTEM TIMERS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
[701] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
[704] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
[ALL] DIAL TYPE
?
[704] DIAL TYPE
DIAL PULSE TYPE
Samsung Business Communications
2-96
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS
Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes available are listed below with their entry numbers.
No
4
5
2
3
6
7
0
1
8
F-STN
CLS-A
CLS-B
CLS-C
CLS-D
CLS-E
CLS-F
CLS-G
CLS-H
Class Description
Follow station toll restriction
Follow toll class A (Unrestricted)
Follow toll class B
Follow toll class C
Follow toll class D
Follow toll class E
Follow toll class F
Follow toll class G
Follow toll class H (All restricted)
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: F-STN
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 403.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Dial ring plan number (1~6)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
[701] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
[ALL] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F_STN
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
Samsung Business Communications
2-97
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter day toll class (e.g., 2 for CLS-B)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 507
MMC 701
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:CLS-B 2:F-STN
Samsung Business Communications
2-98
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[404] TRUNK NAME
Allows a name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 404.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRUNK NAME
[704] TRUNK NAME
[704] TRUNK NAME
TELECOMS
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104
MMC 405
STATION NAME
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
Samsung Business Communications
2-99
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
ENTERING NUMBERS
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the cursor to the next position.
The # button can be used for special characters:
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 405.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter trunk number using the dial keypad
[701] CO TEL NO.
[704] CO TEL NO.
[704] CO TEL NO.
3054264100
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
Samsung Business Communications
2-100
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan destinations are not entered, the default ring plan is ring plan 1.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 406.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to move to the next step.
4. Dial station number or station group number
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to the next ring plan destination and repeat step 4.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[701] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
[704] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
[All] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
[704] TRK RING
1:500 2:500
[704] TRK RING
1:205 2:500
[704] TRK RING
1:205 2:501
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202
MMC 507
MMC 601
CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-101
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a trunk lock-up.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 407.
Display shows:
2. Dial in trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button selected trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
[ALL] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-102
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
Allows the system administrator to select which Music-On-Hold (MOH) source can be heard on each trunk. There is one internal music source (371) and a maximum of six external music sources are available with a MIS module installed in a 3-chassis system (372 ~
377).
Note: When enabled, the AA (Auto Answer) MOH option will allow an MOH source to play to callers who are automatically answered by the system before being connected to a station, voice mail or auto attendant. This AA MOH source can be the same as the source set for MOH.
CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the source to the external sound source of the MIS module.
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 408.
Display shows current setting.
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Enter MOH source number (e.g., 3761)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.
4. Enter AA source number
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:TONE
[704] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:TONE
[ALL] TRK MOH
MOH:? AA:?
[705] TRK MOH
MOH:3761 AA:TONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 756 ASSIGN VMMOH
Samsung Business Communications
2-103
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[409] TRUNK STATUS READ
This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk.
No Type
00
01
PORT
TYPE
02
03
1A2 EMULATE
TRK FORWARD
04 LINE
05 DIAL
06-11 TOLL TYPE 1-6
12-17 RING PLAN 1-6
18
19
MOH SOURCE
DISA LINE
Description
Port Number (Chassis/Slot/Port)
LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP
1A2 Emulation On/Off
Trunk Forward On/Off
CO/PBX
Ring Plan Toll Restriction (1-6)
Ring Plan Ring Destination (1-6)
MOH Source
DISA Status
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOWS TRUNK
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 409.
Display shows:
2. Enter trunk number via dial keypad (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Enter desired option 00-19 (e.g., 01)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRK STATUS
PORT:C1-S5-P01
[704] TRK STATUS
PORT:C1-S5-P04
[704] TRK STATUS
TYPE:LOOP TRUNK
Samsung Business Communications
2-104
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400
MMC 401
MMC 402
MMC 403
MMC 404
MMC 406
MMC 408
MMC 410
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
Samsung Business Communications
2-105
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been added. Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.
CONDITIONS y y
The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.
The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office line. DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan(s).
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 410.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunks.
OR
3. Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan (e.g. 3)
OR
Using the dial keypad, press 1 to select or 0 not to select the Ring Plan (e.g. 1 to select).
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] 123456
DISA LINE:000000
[704] 123456
DISA LINE:000000
[ALL] 123456
DISA LINE:000000
[704] 123456
DISA LINE:001000
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
Samsung Business Communications
2-106
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[411] ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
Defines the type of signalling for each E1 trunk assigned to the module. There are four kinds of trunk, as detailed below. There are three types of signalling associated with E&M and DID. E1 channels (1-30) that are not used should have TYPE programmed as UN-
USED.
Trunk Signalling Comments
BR_14301_OPT
RU_LOOP
BRAZIL, L, I, ERICSSON, 2/1914, FOR TEST
RUSSIA, L, I/O, LOOP START
E&M IMMEDIATE
DELAYED
ITU_WINK
ITU_WINK_MPD
BR_CONTINU
BR_PULSED
BR_R2_DIGIT
BR_BLD_160
BR_BLD_157
BR_14102_NOT
BR_14102_OPT
RU_ADSE
RU_HARRIS_UK
RU_USER_ROM
AR_WINK
AR_WINK_MPD
CHINA_NO1
POL_WINK_MPD
COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_N
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 2/1914, 14102_O
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914
BRAZIL, E, I/O, ERICSSON, 1/1914
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD
CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA
POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD
DID IMMEDIATE
DELAYED
ITU_WINK
ITU_WINK_MPD
BR_CONTINU
BR_PULSED
BR_R2_DIGIT
RU_ADSE
RU_HARRIS_UK
RU_USER_ROM
AR_WINK
AR_WINK_MPD
CHINA_NO1
POL_WINK_MPD
UNUSE -
COMMON, E/D, I/O, IMMEDIATE START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, DELAY
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START
COMMON, E/D, I/O, WINK START WITH MPD
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, CONTINUE
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, PULSED
BRAZIL, E/D, I/O, R2 DIGITAL
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, PABX
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, HARRIS, PABX, UK_EM
RUSSIA, E/D, I/O, USER ROM
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK
ARGENTINA, E/D, I/O, WINK-MPD
CHINA, E/D, I/O, NO.1 OF CHINA
POLAND, E/D, I/O, POLAND WINK MPD
-
Samsung Business Communications
2-107
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
CONDITIONS
An E1 module must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO E1 TRUNK
CARD’ is displayed.
This MMC is not currently valid in the UK/EU.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 411.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Press Volume button to select trunk type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Volume button to signalling select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] E1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
[705] E1 SIGNAL
UNUSE
[ALL] E1 SIGNAL
?
[705] E1 SIGNAL
E&M:IMMEDIATE
[705] E1 SIGNAL
E&M:ITU_WINK
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
MMC 400
MMC 401
MMC 402
MMC 403
MMC 404
MMC 405
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
Samsung Business Communications
2-108
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
MMC 406
MMC 407
MMC 408
MMC 409
MMC 410
MMC 411
MMC 412
MMC 413
MMC 414
MMC 415
MMC 416
MMC 417
MMC 418
MMC 419
MMC 420
MMC 421
MMC 422
MMC 423
MMC 424
MMC 426
MMC 433
MMC 434
MMC 436
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
TRUNK STATUS READ
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
VMS CALL TYPE
MPD/PRS SIGNAL
REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN
E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
BRI OPTIONS
PRI OPTIONS
MSN DIGIT
TRUNK COS
S/T MODE
BRI S0 MAPPING
TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
COST RATE
CONNECTION STATUS
TRUNK TMC GAIN
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-109
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E&M modules for proper signalling. These trunks can also use the translation tables in MMC 714.
No Signalling condition type
CONDITIONS
An analogue E&M/DID Trunk module must be installed in the OfficeServ 7400 system.
Otherwise, the ‘NO E&M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
IMMEDIATE START
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 412.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Enter desired trunk type selection from above list.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START
[705] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START
[ALL] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START
[705] TRK SIGNAL
WINK START
Samsung Business Communications
2-110
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 416
MMC 714
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-111
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[413] VMS CALL TYPE
Defines the type of signalling for voice mail-assigned trunk.
Type Description Default
NO
YES
NO
CONDITIONS
This program applies to the SVM-800 voice mail system which is no longer supplied or supported by Samsung.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE TABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 413.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 702)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Enter 1 for YES, or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] CTYPE AP:N
AT:N AA:Y VM:N
[702] CTYPE AP:N
AT:N AA:Y VM:N
[702] CTYPE AP:N
AT:N AA:Y VM:N
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-112
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL
Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detection (MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal (PRS) trunk.
An MPD Trunk will detect a C.O-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.
Type
PRS 1
PRS 2
PRS 3
MPD
Description
When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped. The call is not released.
When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and the call is released.
The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.
Metering Pulse Detection.
CONDITIONS y y
If the trunk is designated as PRS, the call duration timer will be started and the results printed on the SMDR record.
PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE (NORMAL)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 414.
Display shows:
2. Dial desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
[701] TRK PRS
NONE
[705] TRK PRS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-113
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
3. Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3, 3 for
MPD or 4 for NORMAL.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through options and use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
[705] TRK PRS
PRS 2
Samsung Business Communications
2-114
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis.
There are two options for this MMC:
No Option Description
0 REPORT: NO Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These records will continue to be stored in the station review list.
1 REPORT: YES Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list. These records will also be stored in the station review list.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 415.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Use Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Use Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[701] TRK ABNDN
REPORT:YES
[705] TRK ABNDN
REPORT:YES
[705] TRK ABNDN
REPORT:NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-115
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[416] ASSIGN E&M/DID RINGDOWN
This MMC defines which ring destination table an E&M or DID trunk will follow for incoming calls. There are three options for each trunk as defined below.
No Option Description
0 FOLLOW INCOM DGT When a trunk is set to this option, calls will ring at the destination that matches the digits received from the Trunk line.
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS When a trunk is set to this option, calls will ring at the destination defined in MMC 714 that matches the digits received from the TRUNK LINE.
2 FOLLOW TRK RING If this option is selected, press the Right Soft button and ‘NO.
RCV DIGIT’ will appear on the display. Here is where the number of incoming digits from Trunk Line must be entered (0-4).
When a trunk is set to this option, calls will ring at the destination defined in MMC 406 for that trunk. If the destination defined in MMC 406 is a VMAA port or group then the system will repeat the digits received from the CO to the port when it answers.
CONDITIONS
R2MFC trunk lines only support the ‘FOLLOW INCOM DGT’ and ‘FOLLOW DID
TRANS’ options.
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW INCOMING DIGIT
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 416.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Dial option number (0~2)
OR.
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return step 2.
If FOLLOW TRK RING is selected, the
LCD display shows step 4.
[701] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
[705] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
[ALL] EM/DD RING
FOLLOW INCOM DGT
[705] EM/DD RING
NO. RCV DIGIT:00
2-116
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter the number of incoming digits.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 714
[705] EM/DD RING
NO. RCV DIGIT:00
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-117
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.
CONDITIONS y y
This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only
PCM30 framing.
After changing this option, MMC 418 must be used to restart the module to make the change effective.
DEFAULT DATA
TEPRI CRC4: ON
TEPRI2 Port 1 CRC4: ON, Port 2 CRC4: OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 417.
Display shows:
2. Enter first trunk number in PRI module (e.g. 701)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] E1/PRI CRC
ON
[701] E1/PRI CRC
ON
[701] E1/PRI CRC
OFF
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 418 BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
Samsung Business Communications
2-118
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI module at the module level. This action is required to update the processor on the BRI or PRI module with any changes in the relevant
MMCs and to put these changes into effect.
CONDITIONS y y
A BRI module or TEPRI module or TEPRI2 module must be installed in the system.
Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 module must be set ON to PRI mode.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 418.
Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit:
2. Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI module (e.g., 733)
OR
Press Volume button to select the first trunk and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Pressing 1 will advance to step 4.
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[725] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
[733] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
[733] RESTART
CARD RESTART?YES
[733] RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419
MMC 420
MMC 423
MMC 424
BRI OPTIONS
PRI OPTIONS
S/T MODE
BRI S0 MAPPING
Samsung Business Communications
2-119
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[419] BRI OPTIONS
Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis. There are different options depending on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS
No Option Description
0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.
1 BRI MODE
P-P NOR
BRI access mode select.
Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
P-P DID
P-M NOR
P-M MSN
Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system (MMC714) to a single device.
Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.
Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the
MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421.
2 DLSEND
ENBLOCK
OVERLAP
BRI dial sending mode select.
Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.
Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.
3 CLIP TABLE
4 NB TYPE
Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If
NONE, MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network.
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.
NETWORK Network specific number
Samsung Business Communications
2-120
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description
5 NB PLAN
UNKNOWN
ISDN
DATA
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.
Unknown numbering plan
ISDN numbering plan (CCITT E.163-164)
Data numbering plan (CCITT X.121)
TELEX
NATIONAL
Telex numbering plan (CCITT F.69)
National standard numbering plan
PRIVATE Private numbering plan
EXTEN Local plan
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS
No Option Description
0 ANY CHANNEL When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy (e.g., Preferred channel selection). If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free (e.g., Exclusive channel selection).
1 POWER FEED This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied (YES or
NO)
CONDITIONS y y
A BRI module must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed.
If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI module that is affected by these changes MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective.
DEFAULT DATA
For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:
CHANNEL ANY: YES
BRI MODE: P-P DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: NATIONAL
NB PLAN: ISDN
For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:
CHANNEL ANY : YES
POWER FEED : NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-121
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 419.
Display shows first BRI channel.
2. Dial BRI trunk number (e.g., 727)
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and press Right Soft button.
[725] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES
[727] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES
OR
Press Volume button to select option item and
press Right Soft button.
[727] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:NO
[727] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-M MSN
[727] BRI-TRK
DLSEND :OVERLAP
[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE :NONE
[727] BRI-TRK
NB TYPE:UNKNOWN
[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE:1 OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button.
5. Dial BRI station number (e.g., 729)
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and press Right Soft button.
[729] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY:YES
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Volume button to select option item and
press Right Soft button.
8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[729] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY:YES
[729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :NO
[729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :YES
2-122
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 418
MMC 421
MMC 423
MMC 714
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
MSN DIGIT
S/T MODE
DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-123
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[420] PRI OPTIONS
This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk module.
No Option Description
0 CHANNEL ANY When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.
1 PRI MODE
NORMAL
PRI access mode select.
Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
DID
2 DLSEND
ENBLOCK
OVERLAP
3 CLIP TABLE
Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and translated within the system (MMC714) to a single device.
PRI dial sending mode select.
Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.
4 NB TYPE
Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.
Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If
NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with the selected number is sent to the network.
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.
NETWORK Network specific number
5 NB PLAN
UNKNOWN
ISDN
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.
Unknown numbering plan
ISDN numbering plan (CCITT E.163-164)
DATA
TELEX
NATIONAL
PRIVATE
Data numbering plan (CCITT X.121)
Telex numbering plan (CCITT F.69)
National standard numbering plan
Private numbering plan
EXTEN Local plan
6 SAME CONNID When this option is set to OFF, ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and if set to ON, searched by data channel id.
Samsung Business Communications
2-124
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
CONDITIONS y y
Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 module must be set to ON for PRI mode.
After changing data in this program, run MMC 418 to apply the new settings.
DEFAULT DATA
CHANNEL ANY: YES
PRI MODE: DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: NATIONAL
NB PLAN: ISDN
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 420.
Display shows:
2. Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI module (e.g., 730)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
[701] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES
[730] PRI OPTION
CHANNEL ANY:YES
OR
Press Volume button to select option.
4. Press Volume button to make selection.
Then press Right Soft button.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[730] PRI OPTION
PRI MODE:DDI
[730] PRI OPTION
PRI MODE:NORMAL
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 418
MMC 714
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-125
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[421] MSN DIGIT
Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number, either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call.
If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,
MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released.
You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting option: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the station (which is alerted to the call).
CONDITIONS y y
A BRI module must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message is displayed.
For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.
DEFAULT DATA
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 421.
Display shows:
2. Enter trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter the location 1-8 (e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select location and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter digits to be translated (e.g., 4603881) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move
to the destination selection (Max. Digit is 12)
[701] MSN DGT (1)
DGT:
[704] MSN DGT (1)
DGT:
[704] MSN DGT (4)
DGT:
[704] MSN DGT (4)
DGT:4603881
Samsung Business Communications
2-126
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial keypad (e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
6. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
7. Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
[704] MSN DGT (4)
1:204 2:NONE
[704] MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
[704] MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
Samsung Business Communications
2-127
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[422] TRUNK COS
Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available.
There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: COS 01
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 422.
Display shows first trunk:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.
Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Enter ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to step 4.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Enter the next ring plan class of service (e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to the previous step.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[705] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[ALL] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01
[705] TRK COS
1:05 2:01 3:01
[705] TRK COS
1:05 2:05 03:01
Samsung Business Communications
2-128
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-129
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[423] S/T MODE
Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.
No
0
1
Type
TRUNK
STATION
Description
The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk.
The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone.
CONDITIONS
The BRI module must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO BRI CARD’ is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 423.
Display shows first BRI:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 727)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
[725] S/T MODE
TRUNK
[727] S/T MODE
TRUNK
[ALL] S/T MODE
Select all.
3. Enter circuit type (e.g. station).
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
TRUNK
[727] S/T MODE
STATION
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 424
MMC 418
MMC 419
MMC 421
BRI S0 MAPPING
BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
BRI OPTIONS
MSN DIGIT
Samsung Business Communications
2-130
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[424] BRI S0 MAPPING
This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the BRI card is installed in the system.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 424.
Display shows first terminal number:
2. Dial terminal number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Dial BRI port number.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through ports and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[8701]S0 MAPPING
NONE
[8704]S0 MAPPING
NONE
[8704]S0 MAPPING
712
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419
MMC 423
BRI OPTIONS
S/T MODE
Samsung Business Communications
2-131
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.
There are four types of adjustment:
No Trunk Gain Description
0 +0.0 adjustment
1
2
3
+1.9
-6.0
-2.5
Up 1.9 dB
Down 6.0 dB
Down 2.5 dB
DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0.0
RX: +0.0
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 426.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705) via the dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and
return to step 1.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TRUNK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
[705] TRUNK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
[ALL] TRUNK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
[705] TRUNK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
[701] TRUNK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5
Samsung Business Communications
2-132
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-133
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks within the same system. By default (DIAL=YES) all trunks can use other trunks. To prevent use, select NO.
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 428.
Display shows:
2. Dial the trunk use group number (e.g., 305)
OR
Press Volume button to selection and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunk use groups.
3. Dial the trunk use group number (e.g., 304)
OR
Press Volume button to selection and press Right
Soft button.
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
(301) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
(305) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
(305) USE (304)
DIAL:YES
(305) USE (304)
DIAL:NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-134
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[432] SET H-TRK
Defines the type of signalling for each H-trunk assigned.
DEFAULT DATA
E&M
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 432.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Press Volume button to select trunk type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
[701] SET H-TRK
E&M
[705] SET H-TRK
E&M
[ALL] SET H-TRK
E&M
[705] SET H-TRK
DID
Samsung Business Communications
2-135
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[433] COST RATE
In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. DIAL PLANs are defined in MMC 746 (Costing Dial Plan). RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in
MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or more of the eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be calculated for that particular DIAL PLAN.
Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls. Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming call costing for a trunk.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS: ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 433.
Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate
[701] :12345678
CR :11111111
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right
Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until the cursor is under the Cost Rate number (e.g., 2).
Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO (and press Right Soft button to return to step 1 if required).
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 746
MMC 747
COSTING DIAL PLAN
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
[705] :12345678
CR :11111111
[701] :12345678
CR :10111111
Samsung Business Communications
2-136
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[434] CONNECTION STATUS
This read-only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station, the display will show one of the conference parties and an arrow (Æ). The technician or system administrator can then display the other parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state, the display will show
‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection, the display will show ‘IN-
VALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU, the display will show
‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will show ‘BUSY’ only.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
Display trunk connection status
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
2. Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status:
3. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
Display station connection status
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
702 227
DISPLAY STATUS
702 227
2. Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status.
3. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
235 715
DISPLAY STATUS
235 715
Samsung Business Communications
2-137
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Display trunk status in conference
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
2. Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status:
3. Press Right Soft button to display the next station or trunks involved.
4. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
Display status no connection
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
2. Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status.
3. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
Display status no connection
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
2. Enter invalid station or trunk number.
Display shows INVALID DATA:
3. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
702 227 ,215
Æ
DISPLAY STATUS
702 216
Æ
DISPLAY STATUS
216 702 ,227
Æ
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
702 NONE
DISPLAY STATUS
702 NONE
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
INVALID DATA
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-138
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Display connection status with invalid trunk or station number
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
2. Enter invalid station or trunk number
Display shows INVALID DATA:
3. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
Display connection status with trunk or station number in maintenance busy
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434.
2. Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status:
3. Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 108
MMC 409
STATION STATUS
TRUNK STATUS READ
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
INVALID DATA
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE
DISPLAY STATUS
725 MADE BUSY
DISPLAY STATUS
725 MADE BUSY
Samsung Business Communications
2-139
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN
Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.
DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0 dB
RX: +0 dB
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 436.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired trunk number (e.g., 705) via the dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.
3. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor and
return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[701] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
[705] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
[ALL] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
[705] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB
[701] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-140
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief description of each.
No Counter
CNTER
COUNTER
2 DISA CALL CNTER
3 DISA LOCK CNTER
COUNTER
ALARM
6 UCDS AUDIO ALARM
7 UCD CS LEVEL 1
8 UCD CS LEVEL 2
Default
5
5
99
3
99
0
0
0
0
Description
The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.
The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been activated. RANGE = 1-99.
Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can be made after accessing a DISA line.
RANGE = 1-99.
Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the
DISA line. RANGE = -99
Number of times the system will allow a user to signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.
RANGE = 1-99.
Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.
Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.
Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25.
Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches this value. RANGE = 0-25.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
Samsung Business Communications
2-141
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 500.
Display shows:
2. Enter number from above list (e.g., 6)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter in new value via dial keypad.
If entry is valid, system will return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
ALARM REM.CNTER
05
Æ
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
00
Æ
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
00
Æ02
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-142
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[501] SYSTEM TIMERS
Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.
TIMER TABLE
Timer Name
ALARM TIME
ALERT TONE TIME
ALM REM.INTERVAL
ALM REM RING OFF
ATT. RECALL TIME
AUTO REDIAL INT.
AUTO REDIAL RLS.
BOOTH TIME OUT
(Hotel application only)
CALLBACK NO ANS
CAMP ON RECALL
CID MSG RECEIVE
CID DSP ALLOC TM
CLI DISPLAY TIME
CO CLEAR TIME
Default Range Unit Description
100 0-2500 MIN This is the time the system alarm key will start ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.
1000 100-2500
MSEC
This timer sets the duration of the attention tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice
Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.
25
10
1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is set.
1-25 SEC This timer controls the length of the ring cycle duration when an alarm reminder is set at a station.
30
30
45
005
0-250 SEC This controls how long a transfer recall will ring at a station before recalling the operator.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between attempts after RETRY dialling is set on a station.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a Ring No
Answer condition on a retry number dialled before the auto redial is automatically cancelled.
0-250 MIN Controls the time for which a booth phone is enabled.
30
30
6
500
5
30
1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer.
0-250 SEC This timer controls the time a camped-on call will stay at a destination before recalling to the transferring station.
1-25 SEC The amount of time that the system will allow a valid message from the analogue CID trunk.
000-500
MSEC
Caller ID (CLI) Digital Signal Processor Allocation timer - the length of time the DSP is incircuit to decode analogue Caller ID.
1-25 SEC The amount of time that the Caller ID information remains on the phone’s display.
0-250 SEC The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key remains busy after cleardown.
Samsung Business Communications
2-143
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Timer Name
CO CONFIRM TIME
CO-CO DISCONNECT
CONFIRM TONE TM
CRD TONE INT TM
DIAL PASS TIME
DISA DISCONNECT
DISA LOCK OUT TM
DISA NOANS DISC.
DISA PASS CHECK
DISA NO ACTION
DISPLAY DELAY TM
DOOR LOCK RELES.
DOOR RING DETECT
DOOR RING OFF TM
E-HOLD RECALL TM
Default Range Unit Description
3
20
1000 100-2500
MSEC
30
The tone heard when a feature is activated or deactivated.
0-250 SEC This is the call record tone interval time. An entry other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by all the parties in a recorded conversation. The range for the tone is 001(every second) to 255
(every 255 seconds). A value of 000 means no tone. Requires an SVMi module.
3
30
0-25 SEC This timer monitors the time before connecting the transmit of the phone to the trunk side of an outgoing call.
1-250 MIN This timer controls the maximum duration of a
DISA call.
30
30
30
0-250 MIN According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type, the outgoing call will be disconnected after this timer expires or the outgoing caller will hear the confirm tone.
1-250 MIN This timer monitors the duration of an unsupervised conference; when it expires, both trunks are disconnected.
1-250 MIN This timer controls how long a DISA call is not allowed to be made after the DISA error counter has expired (MMC 500).
0-250 SEC This timer determines when a DISA call is disconnected by force when a called party does not answer.
1-250 MIN This timer defines the period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter.
10
2
500
50
30
45
0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a DISA line will wait for further action from the caller.
1-250 SEC This timer controls how long a display is shown in the LCD and how long error tone is heard.
100-2500
MSEC
10-250
MSEC
This timer controls how long the door lock relay will be activated.
This timer controls the time before a call is answered by the door phone.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of ringing at the door ring destination before automatically cancelling.
0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling.
Samsung Business Communications
2-144
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Timer Name
FIRST DIGIT TIME
HOK FLASH MAX TM
HOK FLASH MIN TM
HOOK OFF TIME
HOOK ON TIME
INQUIRY RELEASE
INTER DIGIT TIME
ISDN INT DGT TM
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
LCR ADVANCE TIME
LCR INTER DIGIT
LONG KEY DETECT
LONG KEY REPEAT
MCL DELAY TIME
MS LED ON TIME
Default Range Unit
10
120
80
100
200
30
10
7
60
5
5
600
300
4
5
Description
1-250 SEC This timer controls how long the system will
20-2500
MSEC
20-2500
MSEC
20-2500
MSEC
20-2500
MSEC wait for dialling to begin before dropping the dial tone and returning the you to error tone.
This timer monitors the duration of a hook- switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration.
This timer monitors the duration of a hookswitch flash to ensure that the flash is valid and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration.
This timer controls the time before dial tone is sent to a single line station.
This timer sets the minimum amount of time that the system will recognize as an SLT hang up.
1-250 SEC This timer monitors the duration of the interaction of the Soft button to determine when to return the LCD back to a normal status. This timer affects only display phones.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before dropping the call and returning you back to error tone.
1-15 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling string on an ISDN call.
10-50 SEC This timer controls the grace period between programming actions while in a programming session. The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the time before selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the grace period between dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.
0-2500
MSEC
This timer controls the time a key must be held down before the key press is repeated.
0-2500
MSEC
0-9 SEC
1-10 SEC
This timer controls the time between repeated digits on a long key press.
This timer controls the time when the system should start transmitting Authorisation Code after sending MCL access code (Cable &
Wireless 131 access). Available in UK only.
This timer controls the duration a Manual Signalling key will remain on after use.
Samsung Business Communications
2-145
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Timer Name
OFF HOOK RING INT
OHVA ANSWER TIME
PAGE TIME OUT
PAGE TONE TIME
PARK RECALL TIME
PC-MMC LOCK TIME
PERI UCD REPORT
POWER DOWN TIME
RECALL
DISCONNECT
RECALL WAIT TIME
ROUTE OPTIMISE
SMDR START /DP
SMDR START /DTMF
SYS HOLD RECALL
TRANSFER RECALL
Default Range Unit Description
15
10
20
500
1-250 SEC This timer controls the time between ring bursts to a user who has a camped-on call.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the time allowed to answer an OHVA call before automatic rejection.
1-250 SEC This timer controls the duration of a page announcement.
100-2500
MSEC
This timer controls the duration of tone burst heard over the page prior to the page announcement.
45
5
5
2000
0-250 SEC This timer controls how long a call is parked before recalling to the call park originator.
1-60 MIN This timer monitors PC programming activity, drops the link if no action is created and returns the system back to secure program status.
3-99 SEC
500-9900
MSEC
This timer determines the interval between periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port.
This timer monitors the power to the ROM pack to begin shutdown status.
2
15
5
30
15
45
20
1-250 MIN This is the time an attendant recall will ring before being disconnected.
0-250 SEC This is the time any recall (hold or transfer) continues to recall at your station before it recalls to the operator.
0-250 SEC When a call is made via Q-SIG signalling, route optimization is activated after this time.
1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary dialling.
1-250 SEC This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls the LCD duration timer on the phones. The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same.
0-250 SEC This timer determines the time calls can be left on hold before recalling to the holding station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting the timer to 000 means that no recalling will take place.
0-250 SEC This timer determines how long transferred calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer.
Samsung Business Communications
2-146
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Timer Name
TRK AUTOMOH DISC
TSW CONN. DELAY
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
UCDS VISUAL ALARM
VOIP RE-ROUTE TM
Default
Range Unit Description
60 1-250 SEC When set to ON, incoming trunk calls are connected to MOH automatically after the
DISA ANSWR timer (MMC 503) expires. In this case the caller hears MOH. If the TRK
AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the call is answered, the call is disconnected.
0 0-10 SEC When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing call to another trunk, the system connects the voice path after this time.
0
0
0-990 SEC When an SVMi-20E module is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call has been waiting at the UCD group before the
UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash along with an audio alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see MMC 500.
0-250 SEC When an SVMi-20E module is installed and the digital UCD package enabled, this counter determines the maximum number of seconds a call at the UCD group before the UCD group’s SUPV key begins to flash as an alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see
MMC 500.
15 0-25 SEC If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk does not receive an acknowledgement message from the called party within this time, the call is treated as failed.
Some timers are disabled when their value is set to ‘0’.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY
Samsung Business Communications
2-147
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 501.
Display shows first timer value:
2. Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system returns to step 2 with new value.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
AA INT DGT TIME
05 SEC
Æ
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
060 SEC
Æ
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
060 SEC
Æ250
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-148
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS
Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.
No Item Description
0 NO ANS FWD This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No
Answer takes place (1-250 sec)
1 DTMF DUR. This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the
SLT port (100-9900 ms)
2 F-DGT DELY This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable delay before generating DTMF digits for In-Band integration (100-
9900 ms)
3 OFFHK SEL. This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call as programmed in MMC 306 (0-250 sec)
4 EFWD DELAY This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.
(1-250 sec)
5 CC RNG DLY If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time, other stations with a CC key for that station will ring.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC
DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC
OFFHK SEL: 008 SEC
EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC
CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC
Samsung Business Communications
2-149
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 502.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all stations and press Right Soft button.
[201] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC
Æ
[205] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC
Æ_
3. Enter new value (must be three digits) via dial keypad (e.g., 020)
System will return to step 2.
4. Dial timer number from above list (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Enter new timer value (must be four digits, e.g.,
0200)
System returns to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[ALL] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC
Æ_
[205] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC
Æ020
[205] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS
Æ_
[205] DTMP DUR.
0100 MS
Æ0200
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102
MMC 306
CALL FORWARD
HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
Samsung Business Communications
2-150
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.
It is not advisable to change these values, with the exception of trunk Flash Time, without assistance from Technical Support.
No
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Item Description
ANS.BAK TM ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain types of E & M signalling and does not affect normal
CO lines.
CLEARING This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the expiration of this timer.
CO SUPV TM CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect received from the
CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system.
DTMF DUR. DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.
F-DGT DELY First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits.
FLASH TIME This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.
NO RING TM This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the call has disconnected.
PAUSE TIME This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial bin.
PRS DET TM This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the
PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be set to 0.
RNG DET TM RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.
WINK TIME This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal that the system will send on an E&M circuit
MF/DP INT This is the interval between sending digit. In case of
DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as
100 ms.
MFR DLY TM This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise.
Range
0-2500 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
10-2500 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
20-2500 MSEC
1-25 SEC
1-25 SEC
0-2500 MSEC
10-2500 MSEC
100-300 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
0-25 SEC
Samsung Business Communications
2-151
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No
13
14
Item Description
DISA ANSWR This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is set to ON (MMC400).
CONN DELAY This is the delay time to connect a voice path when users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk. This is to prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is seized.
DEFAULT DATA
ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC
CLEARING: 2000 MSEC
CO SUPV TM: 0400 MSEC
DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC
FLASH TIME: 0090 MSEC
NO RING TM: 04 SEC
PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC
PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC
RNG DET TM: 0300 MSEC
WINK TIME: 200 MSEC
MF/DP INT: 0800 MSEC
MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC
DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC
CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC
Range
0-9 SEC
0-2500 MSEC
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 503.
Display shows:
2. Dial trunk number (e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.
3. Dial timer number from the list.
OR
Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter new timer value (must be four digits, e.g., 0200)
System returns to step 2.
[701] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS
Æ
[704] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS
Æ
[ALL] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS
Æ_
[704] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS
Æ_
[704] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS
Æ 0200
Samsung Business Communications
2-152
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-153
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.
No
0
1
Item
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
PULSE PER SECOND
Description
Make/Break ratio of dial pulse (01-99)
Number of dial pulses per second (10 or 20)
DEFAULT DATA
MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE
PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 504.
Display shows:
2. Dial 0 or 1 for option.
OR
Press Volume button for selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial new value.
System returns to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
33 MAKE
Æ
PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS
Æ_
PULSE PER SECOND
10 PPS
Æ 20
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
Samsung Business Communications
2-154
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.
Type Description Range
YY Year 00-99
MM Month 01-12
DD Date 01-31
W Day 0-6 (0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)
HH Hour 00-23
MM Minute 00-59
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 505.
Display shows:
2. Enter new time and date using above table.
System returns to step 2.
3. Verify time and date.
Re-enter if necessary.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
OLD:0111095:0901
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
OLD:0111095:0901
NEW:0111121:1445
OLD:0111121:1445
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS (AUTO UPDATE TIME)
Samsung Business Communications
2-155
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[506] TONE CADENCE
Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. The system provides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system can be detected.
Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as some systems may require default settings.
No Item Description
00 BUSY TONE The called station is busy.
01 CONFM/BARGE A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge-In with
Tone has been performed.
02 DIAL TONE The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.
03 DND/NO MORE The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.
04 ERROR TONE An error has been made.
05 HOLD/CAMPON This is the system generated hold tone.
06 MSGWAT TONE This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.
07 RGBACK TONE The called station is ringing.
08 RING TONE
09 TRANSFER
TONE
This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are called.
This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT hook flashes.
10 DID RNGBACK This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.
11 CO BUSY This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system.
12 CO RINGBACK This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or
PBX system.
13 CO DIAL This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX system.
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
BUSY TONE
CONFIRM/BARGE-IN
DIAL TONE
ON
500
200
OFF ON
500
200
CONTINUOUS
500
200
(unit: milliseconds)
OFF
500
5000
Samsung Business Communications
2-156
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
TONE
DND/NO MORE TONE
ERROR TONE
HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE
ON
250
500
500
OFF
250
500
3500
ON
250
500
500
(unit: milliseconds)
OFF
250
500
3500
RING BACK TONE 400 200 400 2000
1000 3000 1000 3000
TRANSFER TONE 100 100 100 100
DID 1000 3000 1000 3000
CO BUSY TONE
CO RINGBACK TONE
350
400
350
200
350
400
350
2000
CO DIAL TONE CONTINUOUS
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 506.
Display shows:
2. Dial tone number from above list (00-13, e.g., 09)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.
3. Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for IN-
TERRUPT.
OR
Press Volume button to select tone control and press
Right Soft button to advance step 4.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Dial new value for interrupt times.
(must be four digits)
Press Right Soft button advances cursor and press Left Soft button retreats cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
TRANSFER TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
TRANSFER TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
TRANSFER TONE:0100
9900 0100 9900
Samsung Business Communications
2-157
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.
An RPO (Ring Plan Override) button is not needed as the system will switch automatically; however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and trunk COS.
The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times:
RING PLAN Start Time End Time
(MON: 1)
(MON: 2)
(MON: 3)
(MON: 4)
(MON: 5)
(MON: 6)
ST: 0000
ST: 0800
ST: 1000
ST: 1200
ST: 1300
ST: 1400
END: 23:59
END: 2200
END: 2000
END: 1800
END: 1600
END: 1500
Using a 24-hour clock in the example above, notice that the END time is within the same
24-hour period as the START time. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00:00.
The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts (08:00) and will stay in Ring
Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts (10:00), and so on. As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan.
If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set, the system will default to the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time.
CONDITIONS y y y
When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail module that only has day/night mode, the day/night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758, VM DAY/NIGHT.
Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence (RP 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) A Ring Plan cannot be omitted (i.e. you cannot program RP 1, 2, 5, etc.)
A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower numbered Ring Plan
Samsung Business Communications
2-158
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day. If no Ring Plan destination is entered, the operator group is the default destination.
DEFAULT DATA
START: NONE
END: NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 507.
Display shows:
2. Dial day number (0-6, e.g., 3 for Weds)
OR
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.
3. Dial ring plan number (1-6, e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.
4. Dial start time (e.g., 1030)
If valid, cursor moves to end time.
Enter end time.
If valid, system returns to step 2.
Begin again.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RING PLAN (SUN:1)
ST: END:
RING PLAN (WED:1)
ST: END:
RING PLAN (WED:2)
ST:_ END:
RING PLAN (WED:1)
ST:1030 END:1800
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722
MMC 723
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-159
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[508] CALL COST
Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call. This information can be displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record.
No
0
1
Display Description
UNIT COST PER MP When the system is installed to receive metering pulses on a C. O. outgoing call. It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 9999. (Currency is PENCE or ECENTS depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210.)
CALL COST RATE This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to
255.
CAUTION
Changing these values when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call cost. This facility requires the Metering Pulse Detection version of the trunk module.
DEFAULT DATA
UNIT COST PER MP : 0200 PENCE, CALL COST RATE : 100 PERCENT
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 508.
Display shows:
2. Dial 0 or 1
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter new value (e.g. 110)
System returns to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
UNIT COST PER MP
0200 PENCE £
CALL COST RATE
100 %
£
CALL COST RATE
110 % £
Samsung Business Communications
2-160
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 110 STATION ON/OFF (CALL COST OPTION)
Samsung Business Communications
2-161
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[510] SLI RING CADENCE
Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide basis. There are five cadences available.
Please call Technical Support before changing any cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings.
No
1
2
3
4
5
Item Description
STN RING
TRK RING
This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.
This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.
DOOR RING This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.
ALM RING
CBK RING
This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.
This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.
DEFAULT DATA
Item ON OFF ON
(unit: milliseconds)
OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 510.
Display shows:
2. Dial cadence number from above list (e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select
Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.
3. Dial new value for interrupt times.
(must be four digits)
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
1:STN RING :0400
0200 0400 3000
3:DOOR RING:0400
0100 0400 2000
3:DOOR RING:0100
9900 0100 9900
Samsung Business Communications
2-162
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-163
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
This MMC defines the cadence (flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI module. There are two choices for the
MW lamp cadence: continuous and interrupted.
No
0
1
Item Description
INTERRUPTED The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.
The shortest ‘on’ time is 100 ms and the longest ‘on’ time is 3000 ms.
The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.
CONTINUOUS When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.
CONDITIONS
Systems with MWSLI modules only.
DEFAULT DATA
INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 511.
Display shows:
2. Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
3. Dial new values for interrupt times (four digits)
MW LAMP CADENCE
2000 2000
Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MW LAMP CADENCE
INTERRUPT LED
MW LAMP CADENCE
INTERRUPT LED
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-164
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.
Dates are entered in a month-day format: for example, July 4th would be 0704. One ring plan applies to all holidays.
DEFAULT DATA
NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED
FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 512.
Display shows the Ring Plan:
2. Press Right Soft button advance cursor.
Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.
OR
Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)
3. Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor.
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 1
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 2
4. Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to advance cursor
5. Press Volume button to select entry and press Right
Soft button enter and advance cursor
6. Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad
(e.g., 0704)
7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
RING PLAN
FOLLOW 2
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
05:
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
05:0704
Samsung Business Communications
2-165
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[513] HOTEL TIMER
This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest-rooms are set. These are system-wide timers that affect all rooms. Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details.
No Item
0 CHECK OUT TIME
1 ROOM CLEAN TIME
2 CHECK IN END TM
Description
If a room is occupied after the checkout time, an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill. (If a room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day’s room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to HOLD allows a late checkout to be performed.)
This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.
This is used to decide if an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is reached. For example, if you set the Check In End time as 5 am, all rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra day at the Check Out Time (which might be, say, 11 am). Rooms checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day, if still occupied at the Check Out Time.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 513.
Display shows:
2. Select the timer using the Volume buttons.
3. Enter new time using 24-hour clock format system returns to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
CHECK OUT TIME
HH:MM : :
ROOM CLEAN TIME
HH:MM : :
ROOM CLEAN TIME
HH:MM : 11:30
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-166
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[514] TONE SOURCE
This program can assign an external tone source (e.g. a music source) instead of the normal system tone (TONE) for certain calls. The tones that can be changed are:
No Type
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 514.
Display shows:
2. Enter the tone number 0-6 (e.g. 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial a number for external tone source (e.g. 3762)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone number and press Right Soft button to store.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
BUSY TONE
TONE
DIAL TONE
TONE
DIAL TONE
3762
Samsung Business Communications
2-167
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT
Defines up to 10 summertime periods. The system time will automatically increase by an hour at 2 a.m. on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3 a.m. on the assigned End date.
Dates are entered as follows:
NO= entry number 01–10
YY= year (last 2 digits, e.g. 06 for 2006)
START = start date (MMDD, e.g. 0801 is 1st August)
END = end date (MMDD, e.g. 0910 is 10th September)
For example, the entry might be:
NO : YY : START : END
01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 515.
Display shows:
2. Dial 01–10 to select entry number (e.g. 01)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter dates as described above.
NO : YY : START : END
01 : : :
NO : YY : START : END
01 :_ : :
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505
MMC 861
NO : YY : START : END
01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
SYSTEM OPTIONS (AUTO UPDATE TIME)
Samsung Business Communications
2-168
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN 1-6: 500
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 600.
Display shows:
2. Dial the ring plan number (1~6)
OR
Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.
3. Dial the group number.
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press
Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500 2:500
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500 2:500
OPERATOR GROUP
1:501 2:500
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-169
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP
This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 80 programmable groups available.
The options for setting up these groups are as follows:
No Option
0 TYPE
Description
This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following:
0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.
1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here. Check all programming in MMC 726 to ensure that the In band DTMF codes are properly set.
2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two methods of UCD:
TYPE 1 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement device to play to callers while they are on hold.
Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations. a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the announcement with a hook-flash and a transfer back to the UCD group. b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement. c) Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the announcement in its entirety. d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a previous caller is currently connected to the announcement device.
TYPE 2 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination (see below) is defined as a VMS UCD group on an installed SVMi-20E module.
The digital announcer in the SVMi-20E module supplies two recorded announcements to callers in a queue. The first announcement is played only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long as the caller is in queue.
This type of UCD group has the following advantages: a) No external device need be installed to provide an announcement. b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously. c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free
UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes available.
Samsung Business Communications
2-170
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No
0
Option
TYPE (contd)
1 RING MODE
Description d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.
Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC
607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a system due to availability of system resources.
3 AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto Attendant
(AA) module must be installed in the system to do this.
4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail module.
5 MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged station will return the message to the message group so any member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than one message group, then any message indications made by that station would be for the first numerical message group they are a member of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station groups.
6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 stations for a video conference.
7. VMSUCD GRP: This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from the SVMi-20. The group members will be the VM ports.
Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide how calls are placed to the group.
0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’ (see below) will be called on a ‘first available’ basis. Calls will first go to the first member; if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member; if the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member, and so on. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls with a selected individual, and other members only getting the calls when that member is busy. The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 48.
1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call among all group members. The number of members allowed for a distributed group is 48.
2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously.
This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group member is busy, they can receive off-hook ring if defined in MMC
300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.
The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode.
Samsung Business Communications
2-171
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description
2
4
5
6
7
9
OVERFLOW
3 GROUP
TRANSFER
NEXT PORT
This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin also ringing the NEXT PORT (see below) after this timer has elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.
This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall will take place.
This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVER-
FLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as:
1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS module.
2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.
3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT port.
MEMBER
NEXT HUNT
List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 48 members for the system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups
The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group member.
GROUP BUSY When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy. UCD is an exception to this rule. This option only works when MMC 210 SGR
INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to ON, all station groups will follow this setting.
ANS
AUTO If set ON, stations will Auto Answer calls to the group (when ring type is
DISTRIBUTED or SEQUENTIAL).
ALL OUT NEXT If set ON, will go to the next port without waiting for the overflow timer if all members of the group are logged out.
Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the group.
Samsung Business Communications
2-172
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
CONDITIONS y y
A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can normally accommodate up to 99 members, but only up to 32 members if the RING MODE is UN-
CONDITIONAL.
To enable off-hook ring for incoming calls to busy members, set OFFHOOK RING in
MMC 300, CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION, to ON. Even in this case, however, the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL.
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL GROUP
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 601.
Display shows:
2. Dial group number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select group and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial feature option number (0-7, e.g., 0)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll options and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. DIAL group type (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.
5. Dial feature option number (0-6, e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll options and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
6. Dial ring option (0-2, e.g., 0)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor back to RING or press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[501] STN.GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
[505] STN.GROUP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:VMAA GROUP
[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:VMAA GROUP
[505] STN GROUP
RING:DISTRIBUTE
[505] STN GROUP
RING:SEQUENTIAL
Samsung Business Communications
2-173
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
7. Dial next feature option and continue.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203
MMC 204
ASSIGN UA DEVICE
COMMON BELL CONTROL
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[505] STN GROUP
RING:SEQUENTIAL
Samsung Business Communications
2-174
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[602] STATION GROUP NAME
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station group.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 602.
Display shows:
2. Dial group number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.
[500] SGR NAME
[505] SGR NAME
[505] SGR NAME
TELECOMS
4. Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104
MMC 404
MMC 601
STATION NAME
TRUNK NAME
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-175
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute. There are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 99 members per group.
One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk member from other groups to prevent accidental access.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9
ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801
ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803
ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804
ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 603.
Display shows:
2. Enter valid trunk group (e.g., 9)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Press Right Soft button to change mode.
OR
Press Volume button to change mode to member.
4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number of member and enter valid member number
(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
[9] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
[9] TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
[9] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:NONE
[9] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 05:NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-176
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Enter valid trunk number (e.g., 729)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6. Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9 if necessary.
7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
VoIP PROGRAMMING
MMC 832
MMC 833
VoIP ACCESS CODE
VoIP IP TABLE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[9] TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:729
Samsung Business Communications
2-177
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones. Each page zone can have up to 99 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one zone. Page zone (*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page zone 0.
DEFAULT DATA
NO STATIONS ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 604.
Display shows:
2. Enter the page zone number (0-4, e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter index number (e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter station number (e.g., 205) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
INT.PAGE ZONE(0)
MEMBER 01:NONE
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 01:NONE
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 05:NONE
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 05:205
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-178
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.
The OfficeServ 7400 system must be equipped with an MIS module to allow external paging.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 605.
Display shows first page zone:
2. Dial page zone number (e.g., 6)
OR
Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Dial member number (e.g., 3)
OR
Use Volume button to select member numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Dial relay number via dial keypad (e.g., 3751) and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)
MEMBER 1 :NONE
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 1 :NONE
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 3 :NONE
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 3 :3751
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-179
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.
A library of up to 2500 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can have up to 500 numbers (or 950 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) and each station can have up to 50 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10.
Each speed number may contain up to 24 digits.
DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES
STATIONS: 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 606.
Display shows:
2. Press Right Soft button to advance to next line.
OR
You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button.
3. Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4. Enter desired extension number via dial keypad.
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
BUSY LIST:180
SYSTEM:20
FREE LIST:20
EXT201:1
FREE LIST:20
EXT205:1
Samsung Business Communications
2-180
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Enter valid number for bins.
(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105
MMC 106
MMC 705
MMC 706
STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
FREE LIST:20
EXT205:5
Samsung Business Communications
2-181
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[607] UCD OPTIONS
Sets up UCD options when an AA module has been installed. MMC 601 must have already been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.
(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA module and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When the group overflow timer in
MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA module. It is here that the caller is played the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.
The following program options apply:
No Option Description
00 FIRST MESSAGE After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first message will immediately play.
This message will only be played once for the caller.
01 SECOND MESSAGE If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD
Recall Time), the caller will be played the second message.
This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below.
02 EXIT CODE
03 RETRY COUNT
While the caller is hearing a message (but not during MOH), the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination (see Final Destination).
The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used, the first and second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use.
The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the UCD message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means that there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in
DND.
Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear the second message again before being transferred to the final destination.
Samsung Business Communications
2-182
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description
04 FINAL DESTINATION This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a
UCD agent.
This destination is only reached if (a) the caller dials an exit digit during a message or (b) the retry count has expired. The final destination can be a station number, a group number, a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing button ‘A’ plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a destination of
NONE (Hold button).
If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a
FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination will forward or overflow.
If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final destination indefinitely.
To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the final destination a group (even if the group has only one station in it.)
05 RING NEXT TIME This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.
If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000, an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in
MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers. This will simulate a circular hunt group.
06 UCD RECALL TIME
07 MOH SOURCE
08 WRAP-UP TIME
After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, they will be placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the caller will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is
00-99. The default is 10.
This option determines what Music-On-Hold source callers will be connected to between messages.
This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The default is 010.
Samsung Business Communications
2-183
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description
09 AUTO LOG OUT
10 ALLOUTÆFINAL
This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.
This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.
This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.
If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will disconnect.
11 AGENT PIN NO This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be entered in MMC 717.
12 GROUP BUSY NEXT This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.
DEFAULT DATA
FIRST MSG: 61
SECOND MSG: 62
EXIT CODE: NONE
RETRY COUNT: 03
FINAL DEST: 500
RING NEXT: 30 SEC
UCD RECALL: 10 SEC
MOH SOURCE: NONE
WRAP-UP: 10 SEC
AUTO LOG OUT: ON
ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF
AGENT PIN NO: OFF
GROUP BUSY NEXT: OFF
Samsung Business Communications
2-184
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 607.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial group number.
OR
Press Left Soft button to position cursor under message number and enter new message.
OR
Press Right Soft button and advance to next option using the Volume buttons to select an option.
3. Press Right Soft button and advance to next option.
Use the Volume buttons to make a selection.
OR
Make a selection using the dial keypad.
4. Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and to return to step 1.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[530] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :61
[542] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :61
[530] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :25
[530] UCD GROUP
UCD RECALL:10 SEC
[530] UCD OPTION
UCD RECALL:10 SEC
[530] UCD OPTION
EXIT CODE :NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-185
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 2500 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 608.
Display shows first station:
2. Enter desired EXT number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Enter valid number for bins (e.g., 50)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[201] REVIEW BLK
10:0060 FREE
[205] REVW BLOCK
10:0060 FREE
[205] REVW BLOCK
50:0010 FREE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119
MMC 312
MMC 725
CALLER ID DISPLAY
ALLOW CALLER ID
SMDR OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-186
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[609] CALL LOG BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone. With the ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 2500 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 609.
Display shows first station:
2. Enter desired EXT number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Enter valid number for bins (e.g., 50)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] LOG BLOCK
10:0070 FREE
[205] LOG BLOCK
10:0070 FREE
[205] LOG BLOCK
50:0030 FREE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-187
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or during an OHVA. Up to 100 stations can be allowed text messaging.
DEFAULT DATA y NOT USED (no text messaging allowed) y Large LCD keysets are automatically set to USED (text messaging allowed)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 611.
Display shows:
2. Enter the number of a station.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
[201] TMSG STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
[202] TMSG STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
3. Specify whether text messaging will be used or not.
[202] TMSG STN
USED
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 117 EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
Samsung Business Communications
2-188
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature. Up to 100 stations can be allowed this feature. Each allowed station can have up to five pre-programmed conference groups.
CONDITIONS
This feature is only for Large LCD phones and WIP-5000M mobile phone.
DEFAULT DATA
Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature (USED).
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 612.
Display shows:
2. Enter the number of a station.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Specify whether Group Conference feature can be used or not.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] CONF STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
[202] CONF STN
NOT USED :100 FREE
[205] CONF STN
USED
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-189
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use groups. This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations, outgoing calls through a trunk lines, or call answering.
CONDITIONS
Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 300, and trunk use groups from 301 to 500.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: 001
ALL TRUNKS: 301
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 614.
Display shows first station:
2. Enter 0 if you want to set a station group.
Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Enter number of station/trunk.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4. Enter the number of the use group
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
STATION GROUP
201 :001
TRUNK GROUP
701 :301
TRUNK GROUP
702 :301
TRUNK GROUP
702 :302
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304
MMC 317
MMC 428
ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
Samsung Business Communications
2-190
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[615] MGI GROUP
This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services. This allows ‘grading’ of
MGI modules for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into groups. Any entries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616.
No Type Description
0 LOCAL ITP
1 PUB IP ITP
2 VOIP NTWK
3 PUB IP NTWK
4 VOIP TRUNK
5 PUB IP TRK
6 ITP PAGED
This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a private IP network
This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public IP network.
This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7400 systems across a private IP network.
This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7400 systems on a public IP network
This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network
This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network
This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP phones across a private IP network
The MGI ports have two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed. The members for each selection are the actual ports on the MGI module.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 615.
Display shows the first available option:
2. Press Volume button to select an user type.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Press Volume button to select an option and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to store data and return to step 1.
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
Samsung Business Communications
2-191
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-192
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[616] MGI USER
This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not used, allocation of MGI ports will be controlled by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations
(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations (32XX), VoIP Networking trunks (83XX),
H.323 trunks (84XX), SIP trunks (85XX) and MGI facsimile. Only one assignment per
MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 616.
Display shows the first available option:
2. Enter MGI dial number.
OR
Press Volume button to select an MGI port and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter MGI user dial number.
OR
Press Volume button to select an MGI user and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-193
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[700] COPY COS CONTENTS
This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
‘F’ KEY Used to advance to MMC 701
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 700.
Display shows:
2. Dial selected COS to copy (e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor and advance to next step.
3. Dial target COS (e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.
4. Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press
Right Soft to advance cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
COPY COS ITEMS
COS01
ÆCOS01
COPY COS ITEMS
COS05
ÆCOS01
COPY COS ITEMS
COS05
ÆCOS06
COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-194
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for creating a new class of service (COS). A maximum of 30 classes of service are allowed.
NOTE: If the ‘unsupervised conference’ feature is enabled, a programmed CONF key must be available on phones to allow re-entry into a conference call.
This MMC is divided into five categories.
No Category Description
TOLL
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
COS
00 AA CALER
LEVEL
Follow toll class A (Unrestricted)
Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703
Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703
Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703
Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703
Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703
Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703
Follow toll class H (All restricted)
Default
YES
Description
Auto answer control by caller
01 ABSENCE YES Absence
02 ALM CLR YES Alarm Clear
03 AUTO RDL YES Retry on busy
04 CALLBACK YES Callback
05 CLIP ABN
06 CLIP INQ
07 CLIP INV
YES
YES
YES
Caller ID Abandon
Caller ID Inquire
Caller ID Investigate
08 CONFER. YES Conference
09 DALM CLR YES DISA alarm ring clear
10 DIRECT.
11 DISA
12 DND
13 DND FWRD
YES
YES
YES
Allow DISA use
Do Not Disturb
Forward Do Not Disturb
14 DND OVRD
15 DOOR
16 DSS
17 DTS
NO
YES
YES
YES
Do Not Disturb Override
Door ring answer
Direct station select
Direct trunk select
19 ICM EXT FWD YES
(SVM-800)
External call forward
Samsung Business Communications
2-195
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
No Category
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Description
COS Default
20 FEATURE YES
21 FLASH YES
22 FOLLOW-ME YES
23 FORWARD YES
24 FWDTOVMS YES
25 GRP I/O YES
26 HOLD YES
27 HOTLINE YES
Call forward to SVM-800
Group in/out
Hold
Hot line and Off-hook selection
Description
Call forward-follow me
28 INTERCOM YES
30 MESSAGE YES
31 MM PAGE YES
32 NEW CALL YES
33 OHVAED YES
34 OHVAING YES
Message
Meet me page
New call
Receive Off-hook voice announcement
Make Off-hook voice announcement
35 ONEA2 YES
36 OPERATOR YES Call to Operator
38 OVERRIDE NO
39 PAGE 0 YES
40 PAGE 1
41 PAGE 2
YES
YES
42 PAGE 3
43 PAGE 4
YES
YES
44 PAGE 5
45 PAGE 6
46 PAGE 7
47 PAGE 8
48 PAGE 9
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
49 PAGE * YES
51 PICKUP YES
52 PRB YES
Barge-In
Page zone 0 Paging
Page zone 1 Paging
Page zone 2 Paging
Page zone 3 Paging
Page zone 4 Paging
Page zone 5 Paging
Page zone 6 Paging
Page zone 7 Paging
Page zone 8 Paging
Page zone 9 Paging
Page zone * Paging
Privacy Release and Bridge
Samsung Business Communications
2-196
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Category
53
54
55 SECURE YES
56 SET RLOC NO
57 SSPD TOL YES
58 STN LOCK YES
59 SYS SPD YES
60 TRK AREC NO
61
COS
REM. HOLD YES
RNG PLAN
TRK EHLD
Description
Default
YES
YES
Description
Remote Hold
Ring Mode Change
Set Relocation
System Speed dial toll check
Station Lock
System Speed dial
Trunk call automatic record
(SVM-800)
Trunk call exclusive hold
63 VM AREC
64 VM AME
NO
NO
65 VM REC NO
66 VMS PSWD NO
67 VMS REC NO
STN GROUP 01-80 YES
GROUP
TRK GROUP 01-30 YES
GROUP
BIVMS STN (SVMi).
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
BIVMS STN 01-16 YES
Auto Record (SVMi)
Answer Machine Emulation
(SVMi)
Call Record (SVMi)
VMS password (SVM-800)
VMS Call Record (SVM-800)
Station group 01~80 calling
Trunk group 01~30 calling
SVMi port 01~16 calling
Samsung Business Communications
2-197
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 701.
Display shows:
2. Dial COS (e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial COS contents categories.
(e.g., 1 for Usable Features)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS categories and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial COS usable feature option (e.g., 12)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press Right Soft button to return to step 4.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
COS CONTENTS(01)
TOLL LEVEL:A
COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A
COS CONTENTS(06)
00:AA CALER :YES
COS CONTENTS(06)
12:DND :YES
COS CONTENTS(06)
12:DND :NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-198
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[702] TOLL DENY TABLE
Provides a way to make toll restriction (call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500 entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service.
Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards (MMC 704, Assign Wild
Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.
Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A
B
C
Used to enter wild card X
Used to enter wild card Y
Used to enter wild card Z
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 702.
Display shows:
2. Dial index number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter toll pattern via dial keypad (e.g., 212)
OR
Enter wild card (e.g., 21X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.
4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).
Enter a 1 for “Yes” or 0 for “No”.
Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
DENY(001):BCDEFG
:000000
DENY(005):BCDEFG
:000000
DENY(005):BCDEFG
212 :000000
DENY(005):BCDEFG
21X :000000
DENY(001):BCDEFG
212 :000100
Samsung Business Communications
2-199
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 703
MMC 704
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-200
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 allowable entries in the allow table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards (MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A
B
C
Used to enter wild card X
Used to enter wild card Y
Used to enter wild card Z
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 702.
Display shows:
2. Dial index number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select index and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202)
OR
Enter wild card (e.g., 20X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.
4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).
Enter a 1 for “Yes” or 0 for “No”.
Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
:000000
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
:000000
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
202 :000000
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
20X :000000
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
202 :000100
Samsung Business Communications
2-201
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702
MMC 704
TOLL DENY TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-202
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
Provides flexibility to toll restriction (call barring) when a specific numbering plan is desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if needed.
DEFAULT DATA
X ENTRIES SET TO 1
Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 704.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z (e.g., Z) and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to
:0123456789* #
X:111111111111
:0123456789* #
Z:000000000000
3. Press Volume button to move cursor to option digit desired (e.g., 5) and enter 1 (put under other
digits as required)
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
:0123456789* #
Z:000001000000
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702
MMC 703
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-203
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 500 entries available for programming (or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS). Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.
NOTE: If 500 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 500-999; if 950 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 050-999.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
B
C
D
E
F
ANS/RLS
Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’
Used to enter name for speed dial bin (see MMC 706)
Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table (MMC 728).
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 705.
Display shows:
2. Dial speed index desired (e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter access code (e.g., 9) plus the phone number up to 24 digits (digits will scroll under)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter name.
SYS SPEED DIAL
500:
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:9–121223456789
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
Samsung Business Communications
2-204
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. If you want to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table (MMC 728),
press the ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial name must exist)
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606
MMC 706
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
SYS SPEED DIAL
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-205
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NO NAMES
PROGRAM BUTTONS
ANS/RLS Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation table (MMC 728).
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 706.
Display shows:
2. Dial system speed entry number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press the F key to return to MMC 705, step 3.
4. If you want to save the speed dial number and name data to the CLI translation table (MMC 728),
press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial number must exist)
SYS SPEED NAME
500:
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
SYS SPEED NAME
505:TELECOMS
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:
SYS SPEED NAME
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-206
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606
MMC 705
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Samsung Business Communications
2-207
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE
Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500 available entries. Authorization codes must be 4-10 digits long.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 707.
Display shows:
2. Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter authorization code (minimum of four digits and a maximum of 10 digits) via dial keypad
(e.g., 1234567890) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter class of service number 01-30 (e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press Right
Soft button to select and return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
AUTHOR.CODE(001)
C:01
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
C:01
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
1234567890 C:01
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
1234567890 C:05
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305
MMC 701
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-208
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[708] ACCOUNT CODE
Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 708.
Display shows:
2. Dial code index number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter account code (maximum 12 digits) via dial keypad (e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button
to move cursor back to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
ACCOUNT CODE
001:
ACCOUNT CODE
005:
ACCOUNT CODE
005:1234
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
Samsung Business Communications
2-209
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables.
No Special Code Description
0
1
PBX CODE
SPECIAL CODE
This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC
401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access code.
This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate central office custom-calling features such as CID Block and
Call Waiting Disable. The special feature codes can be used on a per-call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of 10 entries available, each of which may be up to four digits long.
2 TOLL OVERRIDE This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes toll restriction, trunk access and forced authorization or account codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long.
3 OVRD USE TRK GRP This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 709.
Display shows:
2. Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE or OVRD USE TRK GRP.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter index number (e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
PBX ACCESS CODE
1:
TOLL OVERRIDE
1:
TOLL OVERRIDE
3:_
Samsung Business Communications
2-210
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter via dial keypad the desired access / feature code (e.g., 911)
Press Right Soft button to enter and return to step 3 and enter more entries.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
TOLL OVERRIDE
3:911
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 401
MMC 702
MMC 703
MMC 305
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN FORCED CODE
TOLL RESTRICTION
MMC 702
MMC 703
MMC 704
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
Samsung Business Communications
2-211
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE
The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TA-
BLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature codes.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 710.
Display shows:
2. Dial LCR entry (e.g., 0005)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 1.
4. Enter digit length (max. 31)
Cursor will move to RT (route selection)
5. Enter RT (01-32)
Valid entry will return you to step 1.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR DIGIT (0001)
DIGIT:
LCR DIGIT (0005)
DIGIT:_
LCR DIGIT (0005)
DIGIT:305426
LCR DIGIT (0005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01
LCR DIGIT (0005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01
Samsung Business Communications
2-212
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[711] LCR TIME TABLE
This table, through the LCR ROUTES, allows calls placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 711.
Display shows:
2. Dial day of week (SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)
OR
Press Volume button to make day selection and press Right Soft button.
3. Dial time band (A-D, e.g., B)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4. Dial time via keypad (24-hour format, e.g., 0800)
Cursor moves to LCRT (see MMC 712)
5. Dial time table number (1-4)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
LCR TIME (SUN:A)
HHMM: LCRT:-
LCR TIME (WED:A)
HHMM: LCRT:-
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM: LCRT:-
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:0800 LCRT:-
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:0800 LCRT:1
MMC 710
MMC 712
MMC 713
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-213
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE
The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE,
LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum of 32 routes available.
If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 712.
Display shows:
2. Dial LCR ROUTE table number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to selected table and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4 (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial LCR COS number 1-8 (e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to selected COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Dial TRUNK GROUP access code (e.g., 801)
OR
Press Volume button to selected access code and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
LCR ROUTE (01:1)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
LCR ROUTE (05:1)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:1 G:NONE M:---
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:NONE M:---
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:---
Samsung Business Communications
2-214
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
6. Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number (e.g., 050)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to step 2.
7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 713
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:050
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:---
Samsung Business Communications
2-215
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules. It enables the system to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.
Option Description
NOF DEL DGT
I
A
Number of digits to delete
Insert (before dialling string)
Append (after dialling string)
DIGIT STRING KEY
Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String
Max. No. of Digit Entries
15
14
14
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 713.
Display shows:
2. Enter index number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter number of digits to delete.
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move cursor to next step.
4. Enter digits to be inserted (e.g., 10288)
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and advance to next step.
LCR MODIFY (001)
NOF DEL DGT:00
LCR MODIFY (005)
NOF DEL DGT:00
LCR MODIFY (005)
NOF DEL DGT:01
LCR MODIFY (005)
I:10288_
Samsung Business Communications
2-216
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Enter digits to be appended (e.g., 45678)
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and return to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY (005)
A:_
Samsung Business Communications
2-217
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed on hold. A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number. There is a maximum of
999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service, the call is routed to the operator group.
Option
DGT
MOH SOURCE
PRI
RING PLAN
1: XXX, 2: XXX,
3: XXX, 4: XXX,
5: XXX, 6: XXX
CW
MC
DC
NAME
TONE
CADENCE
Description
Digits to be received from Trunk line (up to 16 digits may be entered).
Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is placed on hold. There are four possible music selections.
DID priority option. There are nine priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come into a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the DDI numbers so that calls from a high-priority DDI number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.
Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If a trunk or trunk group is selected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the received digits to be re-sent. This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line. Entering the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.
Call Waiting Yes/No. (Allows a second DID call to be received.)
The maximum call count. When this is set to 99, the feature will not work. When set to 0, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system will reject the call. When set between 1 and 98, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits, and if the count is the same or higher than this value, the system sends busy signal to caller.
The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching, mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum number of digits that can be deleted is 16.
Enter up to 11 characters to identify call. Refer to MMC 104, STATION
NAME, for how to enter the name.
Assigns ring tone to DLI port
Assigns ring cadence to SLT port
Samsung Business Communications
2-218
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
CONDITIONS
If an E&M line is designated as FOLLOW DID TRANS in MMC 416 (ASSIGN E&M /
DID RINGDOWN), calls are terminated according to the station direct dial translation table in MMC 714, DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION.
DEFAULT DATA
INDEX DIGIT MOH PRI 1-6 CW MC DC NAME
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 714.
Display shows:
2. Enter valid index number (e.g., 005) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter digits to be translated (e.g., 5065) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move
cursor.
4. Enter the MOH source for this entry.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.
5. Enter priority level via dial keypad.
(1-9 or NO)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft buttons to advance to next step.
6. Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan destination via dial keypad (e.g., 530)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance to next step.
DID DIGIT (001)
DGT:
DID DIGIT (005)
DGT:
DID DIGIT (005)
DGT:5065
DID DIGIT (005)
MOH:NONE PRI:NO
DID DIGIT (005)
MOH:NONE PRI:NO
DID DIGIT (005)
1:530 2:
Samsung Business Communications
2-219
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
7. Enter call wait option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance to next step.
8. Enter maximum call count via dial keypad (00-99)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance to next step.
9. Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad (0-16)
O R
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance to next step.
10. Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right
Soft button to return to Step 1.
11. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
DID DIGIT (005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
DID DIGIT (005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
DID DIGIT (005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
DID DIGIT (005)
NAME:
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Refer to RELATED ITEMS in MMC 411, ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE.
Samsung Business Communications
2-220
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
There are 15 messages in the system:
MESSAGES 01-10 are 16-character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can be changed. MESSAGES 11-15 are 16-character blank messages that can be created.
DEFAULT DATA
TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES:
01. IN A MEETING
02. OUT ON A CALL
03. OUT TO LUNCH
04. LEAVE A MESSAGE
05. PAGE ME
06. OUT OF TOWN
07. IN TOMORROW
08. RETURN AFTERNOON
09. ON VACATION
10. GONE HOME
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 715.
Display shows:
2. Enter message number (e.g., 11)
OR
Press Volume button arrow to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter message via dial keypad (maximum 16 characters)
Use ‘A’ button to toggle upper case/lower case.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
PGM.MESSAGE (01)
IN A MEETING
PGM.MESSAGE (11)
Blank Message
PGM.MESSAGE (11)
IN MEETING ROOM
Samsung Business Communications
2-221
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[716] UK LCR OPTION
This MMC provides UK LCR options.
No Option Description
0 NETWORK CODE This table provides the network access code when the call is routed to the secondary network. It contains up to 16 entries. Each code has max. 4 digits and the following “use” options (by default, all codes are empty and all “use” options are NONE):
0 NONE No code.
1 CCC The code used with Call Cost Code (CCC).
2 PIN The code used with PIN Code.
3 BOTH The code used with PIN Code and Call Cost
Code.
1
2
PIN CODE
CCC OPTION
This table provides the PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary network. It contains up to four entries and each code has max. 10 digits. (By default, all tables are empty.)
Selects which number is used for Call Cost Code. (Default:
Station Number).
0 STATION NUMBER Station number used for Call
Cost Code.
1 NONE No Call Cost Code.
3 STATION PIN NO. This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number. (Default: all stations are 1)
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 716.
Display shows:
2. Enter option number 0-3
OR
Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter number 0-16
OR
Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
NETWORK CODE
01: USE:NONE
NETWORK CODE
01: USE:NONE
NETWORK CODE
02:_ USE:NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-222
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter network access code via dial keypad
5. Enter use option number (0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713
CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
NETWORK CODE
02:1234 USE:NONE
NETWORK CODE
02:1234 USE:CCC
Samsung Business Communications
2-223
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[717] UCD AGENT ID
This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log
UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 300 available entries and each entry is tied to a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to four digits long.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 717.
Display shows:
2. Dial code entry number (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to select number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter ID code via dial keypad (e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter group number (e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.
OR
Select all groups
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 607 UCD OPTIONS
AGENT PIN (001)
ID: GRP:NONE
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:_ GRP:NONE
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:1234 GRP:NONE
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:1234 GRP:505
Samsung Business Communications
2-224
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[718] MY AREA CODE
This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 718.
Display shows:
2. Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter area code (maximum 4 digits) via dial keypad
(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to move
cursor back to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
MY AREA CODE
AREA :
MY AREA CODE
AREA :
MY AREA CODE
AREA :2
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Refer to RELATED ITEMS in MMC 411, ASSIGN E1 SIGNAL TYPE
Samsung Business Communications
2-225
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[719] IDLE DISPLAY
This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 719.
Display shows:
2. Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone
(01~12) on which guidance data is to be
displayed.
OR
IDLE DISPLAY (01)
IDLE DISPLAY (02)
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press
IDLE DISPLAY (02)
Right Soft button to save and move to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
WELCOME TO ABC
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 120 LARGE LCD OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-226
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another. This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same type (the same number of buttons).
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 720.
Display shows:
2. Enter the station number to copy to (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.
3. Enter station number to copy from (e.g., 203) and cursor returns to step 2.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 721
MMC 722
MMC 723
[201] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
KEY EXTENDER
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
[205] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
[205] COPY KEY
FROM:203
Samsung Business Communications
2-227
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on phones. First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.
CONDITIONS
This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common programming database. When a new phone is connected, the system copies data from this database to the new phone.
DEFAULT DATA
RESTORE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 721.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
3. Press Volume button to make function selection and press Right Soft button to enter and return to
[201] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
[205] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
[205] SAVE KEY
SAVE
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 722
MMC 723
KEY EXTENDER
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-228
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add-on modules
(AOMs). For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. For AOMs, all buttons are set as DS keys by default. Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad buttons the required number of times. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
1
AB
DGPALM
GPIK
LANREQ
MMPA
PAGE
2
BARGE
EP
HDSET
LANREQ
NEW
PAGE
3
CAD
FAUTO
ICONF
LANREQ
OHVA
RB
4
SETDND
WAKEUP DIAL 9
Feature
AB
ABAND
ABW
ACC
ALARM
AN/RLS
BARGE
BILL
BLOCK
BOOTH
BOSS
WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP
Programmable Button Assignments
Description
ABSENCE
ABANDONED CALL
AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP
ACCOUNT
ALARM
ANSWER/RELEASE
BARGE-IN
BILL (Hotel Feature)
OHVA BLOCK
BOOTH (Hotel Feature)
BOSS/SECRETARY
Feature
MMPG
MS
MSG
MUTE
MW
NEW
NND
NOCLIP
NPG
NS
NXT
Description
MEET ME PAGE
MANUAL
SIGNALLING
MESSAGE
MUTE
MESSAGE WAIT
NEW CALL
NAME NUMBER
DATE
NO CID SEND
NETWORK
PAGE
NETWORK
STATION
CID NEXT
Samsung Business Communications
2-229
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Feature Description Feature Description
CAD
CALL
CAMP
CANMG
CBK
CC
CHIN
CHOUT
CHOICE
CLIP
CONF
CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY
CALL BUTTON
STATION CAMP-ON
OHVA
OPER
PAGE
PROG
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPERATOR
PAGE
MESSAGE CANCEL
CALLBACK
CALL COVERAGE
CHECK IN (Hotel Feature)
PAGPK
PARK
PAUSE
PMSG
CHECK OUT (Hotel Feature) PRB
PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CALL PARK ORBIT
PAUSE
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE
SET PROGRAM CHOICE
(Related to News Server)
CALLER ID
CONFERENCE
PTHR
RB
REJECT
PATH REPLACEMENT
ROOM BILL
(Hotel Feature)
OHVA REJECT CONP
CR
CONNECTED NAME
DISPLAY
CALL RECORD
(Requires SVMi module)
CREDIT CREDIT(Hotel Feature)
CS
CALL STATUS
CSNR
CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER
REDIAL
DGPALM
EASY ALARM SET TO
REMOTE STATION
DICT
DIR
DICTATION
DIRECTORY
DIVERT
DLOCK
EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT
TO SECRETARY
DOOR LOCK
DND
DNDO
DP
DROP
DS
DO NOT DISTURB
DO NOT DISTURB
OVERRIDE
DIRECT PICKUP
CALL DROP
DSS KEY
RETRY
REVW
RP
RSV
RTO
SETDND
SET DO NOT DISTURB
SETMG
SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SG
SLOCAT
STAFF LOCATOR
(Hotel Feature)
SNR
SP
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
UCD SUPERVISOR
SPD
SPKR
SSET
AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
REVIEW
RING PLAN
ROOM STATUS VIEW
(Hotel Feature)
RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE
STATION GROUP
SPEED DIAL
SPEAKER
ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
SET
Samsung Business Communications
2-230
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Feature Description Feature Description
DT
EP
EXTMIC
FAUTO
FLASH
FWRD
GPIK
HDSET
HLDPK
HOLD
HOTEL
ICONF
IDISC
IG
IHOLD
INFDSP
INQIRE
DTS KEY
ESTABLISHED CALL
PICKUP
EXTERNAL MIC
FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH
CALL FORWARD
STATE
STORE
SYSALM
TG
TIMER
TP
TRARPT
SET EXECUTIVE STATE
STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER
SYSTEM ALARMS
TRUNK GROUP
TIMER
TERMINAL PORTABILITY
TRAFFIC REPORT
GROUP PICKUP
HEADSET MODE
HOLD PICKUP
HOLD
TRSF
UA
VG
VM
TRANSFER
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VMS GROUP MESSAGE
(Requires SVM-800)
VOICE MAIL MEMO
(Requires SVMi module)
HOTEL (Hotel Feature)
VMADM
VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
(Requires SVMi module)
ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE VMAME ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION
(Requires SVMi module)
ISDN 3 PTY
DISCONNECTION
VMMSG
IN/OUT GROUP
ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD
VMSCMT
VMSMSG
VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY
(Requires SVMi module)
VMS COMMENT (Requires SVM)
VMS MESSAGE (Requires SVM)
INFORMATION DISPLAY
(Requires News/Call Plus)
INQUIRE
VMSOUT
VMS OUT CALL (Requires SVM)
VMSREC
VMS RECORD (Requires SVM)
IRET
ISPY
LANREQ
LCR
LISTN
LNR
LOG
MMPA
ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE
CID SPY
LAN REQUEST
LEAST COST ROUTING
GROUP LISTENING
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
CALL LOGGING
MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
VMSVAC VMS VACANT (Requires SVM)
VT
VOICEMAIL TRANSFER
WAKEUP
WAKE UP (Hotel Feature)
XCHIN
EXPRESS CHECK IN
(Hotel Feature)
Samsung Business Communications
2-231
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. (Other settings depend on the keyset type.) For AOMs, all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default.
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 722.
Display shows:
2. Enter selected station number (e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter selected key number (e.g., 18)
OR
Press Volume button to select key number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2.
5. Enter extender if required (e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1
Æ
[205] KEY (MAST)
01:CALL1
Æ
[201] KEY (MAST)
18:NONE
Æ_
[201] KEY PROG.
18:NONE
ÆGPIK_
[201] KEY PROG.
18:NONE
ÆGPIK03
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 720
MMC 721
KEY EXTENDER
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-232
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming, except that changes are made system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table.
TYPE OF PHONE
No Type of Phone
00 24 BTN SETS
01 12 BTN SETS
03 EU 6B SETS
05 48/64 BTN AOMS
06 20 BTN SETS
07 28 BTN SETS
08 18 BTN SETS
09 8 BTN SETS
10 99 BTN SETS
11 38 BTN SETS
12 21 BTN SETS
13 14 BTN SETS
14 DS-07S SETS
DIAL KEYPAD
Description
Phone with 24 program buttons
Phone with 12 program buttons
EU phone with 6 program buttons
AOM with 48/64 program buttons
Phone with 20 program buttons
Phone with 28 program buttons
Phone with 18 program buttons
Phone with 8 program buttons
Phone with 99 program buttons
Phone with 38 program buttons
Phone with 21 program buttons
Phone with 14 program buttons
7000 Range phone
COUNT
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
1
AB
DGPALM
GPIK
BARGE
EP
HDSET
2
CAD
FAUTO
ICONF
3 4
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
MMPA
PAGE
NEW
PAGE
OHVA
RB SETDND
DIAL WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP
See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722.
Samsung Business Communications
2-233
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 723.
Display shows:
2. Enter type of set via dial keypad (e.g.,1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
3. Enter key number (e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Using table above, press dial keypad to select number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step
5 to enter extender, if required.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
5. Enter extender if required (e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
TYPE:24 BTN SETS
01:CALL1
Æ
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
01:CALL1
Æ
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:NONE
Æ
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:NONE
ÆGPIK
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:GPIK
ÆGPIK03
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 720
MMC 721
KEY EXTENDER
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-234
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with default 3- or 4-digit numbering for stations, station groups and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches on the MP40 card. There is an error message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code.
No Type of Dial No Description
00 STN DIAL NO.
01 TRK DIAL NO.
02 AA/VD DIAL NO
03 MISC DIAL NO.
This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 201-2xx, 3xx (last 319) or 2001-2xxx
This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx
Not used
This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the alarm sensor are changed or assigned.
Default: Internal MOH: 371
External MOH: 372-377
External PAGE: 3752-3753
Common Bell: 3991 ¤
Loud Bell: 3995
04 STNG DIAL
NUMBER
05 TRKG DIAL
NUMBER
This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx
This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-828
06 FEAT DIAL NUMBER This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned. Dialling codes are entered via the dial keypad by pressing a number the required number of times to select the feature. For example, for
OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.
NOTE: Remember that this program applies system-wide.
07 S0 STN DIAL NO. This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed or assigned.
Default: 8701-8764
09 NTWK LCR DIAL NO This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or more OfficeServ 7400 systems are networked together.
Default: NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-235
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Type of Dial No Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
VIRT EXT DIAL NO
MGI DIAL NO.
IP STN DIAL NO.
WLAN DIAL NO,
VOIP NET DIAL NO
H323 TRK DIAL NO
SIP TRK DIAL NO
UMS DIAL NUMBER
SIP STN DIAL NUMBER
This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: SLT: 3501-3596, DGP: 3401-3496
This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 3801-38xx
This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 3201-3296
This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 3301-3396
This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8301-8364
This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8401-8464
This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8501-8564
This is where IP UMS port directory numbers are changed or assigned
Default: 8665-8696
This is where VOIP SIP station port directory numbers are changed or assigned
Default: 8601-8664.
FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
1
AB
DGPALM
GPIK
LANREQ
MMPA
PAGE
2
BARGE
EP
HDSET
LANREQ
NEW
PAGE
3
CAD
FAUTO
ICONF
LANREQ
OHVA
RB
4
SETDND
DIAL 9 WAKEUP XCHIN WAKEUP WAKEUP
2-236
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Feature Code Assignments and Default
Feature Default
ABAND 64
Description
ABW NONE AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP
ACCT 47 ACCOUNT
ALMCLR 57 ALARM
BARGE NONE BARGE-IN
BILL NONE BILL (Hotel Feature)
BOSS NONE BOSS/SECRETARY
CAMP 45 STATION
CANMG 42
CBK 44 CALLBACK
CHIN
CHOUT
CHOICE
NONE
NONE
NONE
CHECK IN (Hotel Feature)
CHECK OUT (Hotel Feature)
CHOICE (Related to News Server)
CONF 46 CONFERENCE
CONP NONE CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY
CR NONE CALL RECORD (Requires SVMi module)
DGPALM NONE EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION
DICT NONE DICTATION
DIRPK 65
DISALM 58
DIVERT NONE
DLOCK 13
DND 40
EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY
DO NOT DISTURB
FAUTO 14
FLASH 49
FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH
GRPK 66 GROUP PICKUP
HLDPK 12 HOLD PICKUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-237
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
RB
REJECT
RSV
RTO
SELFID
SETMG
SLOCAT
SLTALM
SLTMMC
Feature Default Description
HOLD 11 HOLD
HOTEL NONE HOTEL (Hotel Feature)
ICONF NONE ISDN 3-PARTY CONFERENCE
IDISC
IG
IHOLD
INFDSP
IRET
NONE
53
NONE
NONE
NONE
ISDN 3-PARTY DISCONNECTION
IN/OUT GROUP
ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD
INFORMATION DISPLAY (Requires News/Call Plus)
ISDN 3-PARTY RETRIEVE
LCR
LISTN
LNR
#
NONE
19
LEAST COST ROUTING
GROUP LISTENING
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
MMPA
MMPG
MSG
MYGRPK
NEW
NOCLIP
56
54
43
28
NONE
NONE
MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MEET ME PAGE
MESSAGE
MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP
NEW CALL
NO CID SEND
OHVA NONE
OPER
PAGE
PAGPK
PARK
0
55
10
NONE
PMSG 48
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPERATOR
PAGE
PICKUP PAGE HOLD
CALL PARK ORBIT
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
41
NONE
NONE
15
ROOM BILL (Hotel Feature)
OHVA REJECT
ROOM STATUS VIEW (Hotel Feature)
RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE
SELF SYSTEM ID
SET MESSAGE W/O RING
STAFF LOCATOR (Hotel Feature)
EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION
NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-238
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Feature Default
SNR 17
SPEED 16
Description
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
SSET
STATE
NONE
NONE
ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET
SET EXECUTIVE STATE
UA
VMADM
VMAME
VMMEMO
VMMSG
VMSCMT
VMSMSG
VMSOUT
VMSREC
VMSVAC
WAKEUP
WCOS
67
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
18
59
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION (Requires SVMi module)
ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION (Requires SVMi module)
VOICE MAIL MEMO (Requires SVMi module)
VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY (Requires SVMi module)
VMS COMMENT (Requires SVM -800)
VMS MESSAGE (Requires SVM -800)
VMS OUT CALL (Requires SVM -800)
VMS RECORD (Requires SVM -800)
VMS VACANT (Requires SVM -800)
WAKE UP (Hotel Feature)
WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY
Samsung Business Communications
2-239
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 724.
Display shows:
2. Dial option number to make selection (e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
3. Dial first letter of feature name (e.g., 7)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection then press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4. Enter digits (e.g., 63) via the dial keypad.
5. Press Right Soft button to enter change and continue to make changes.
If an error message appears indicating duplication of access code, enter 1 for YES for change or
enter 0 for NO for no change.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
STN DIAL NUM:C1
S2-P01:201
Æ
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
ABAND :64
Æ_
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PAGE :55
Æ
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE
Æ_
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE
Æ63
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE
Æ63
SAME DIAL EXIST
CHANGE? Y:1,N:0
RELATED ITEMS
ALL MMCs
Samsung Business Communications
2-240
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[725] SMDR OPTIONS
Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report. The following options may be selected:
No Option
00 PAGE HEADER
01 LINE PER PAGE
04 AUTHORIZE
CODE
TIME
06 IN/OUT GROUP
07 DND CALL
08 WAKE-UP CALL
09 DIRECTORY
NAME
13 NO. OF DIAL
MASK
Default
YES
66
02 INCOMING CALL YES
03 OUTGOING CALL YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NONE
10 CALLER ID DATA NO
11 ABANDON CALL NO
0
Description
This option determines whether a page header will print at the top of each page. This would normally be turned off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.
This option selects the length of each page to determine when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines is in the range 01-99.
This option determines whether incoming calls will print on SMDR.
This option determines whether outgoing calls will print on SMDR.
This option determines whether authorization codes will print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, ‘****’ is printed on SMDR.
This option determines whether valid calls will include the minimum call time in total call duration.
This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT
GROUP, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves a group.
This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves DND.
This option determines whether stations receiving an alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.
This option allows the system administrator to enter a name up to 16 characters which will appear on the
SMDR header.
This option can be selected to print Caller ID data received from the Central Office on incoming calls.
This option requires the use of a 132-column wide carriage printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print.
If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which
CID information was received will print on SMDR.
If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last digits of the number dialled field will be masked as asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.
Samsung Business Communications
2-241
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Default
15 INCOMING
ANSWER
NO
16 INTERCOM CALL NO
17 KEY MMC IN/OUT NO
FEED
LINE
23 DID NUM/NAME
24 ITP
REGISTRATION
25 SET
RELOCATION
END
0
YES
NO
NO
Description
If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing before being answered will print on SMDR.
This option determines whether intercom calls will print on SMDR.
If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800.
This option determines where the page feed is inserted on HM REPT (Hotel Application Only)
This option determines that the number of empty lines per each page on HM REPT (Hotel Application Only)
If this option is set to YES, received DID information will print on SMDR.
If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of
ITP phones.
If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Relocations.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY
Samsung Business Communications
2-242
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 725.
Display shows:
2. Dial the option number (e.g., 01)
OR
Use the Volume buttons to scroll through the options and press Right Soft button to select an option.
3. Enter the option data.
OR
Use the Volume buttons to press Right
Soft button to save the data and return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
PAGE HEADER
PRINT: YES
LINE PER PAGE
60 LINE/PAGE
LINE PER PAGE
50 LINE/PAGE
Samsung Business Communications
2-243
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[726] VM/AA OPTIONS
This MMC is used to define all the in-band DTMF codes sent to voice mail ports. These inband codes can be 0-9, A, B or C.
CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION
This is a DTMF signalling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port answers a call. This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it is receiving and where the call is coming from (e.g., call forwarded from extension 225).
CALL PROGRESS TONES
These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of the call (e.g., ring back, busy or disconnect). Most voice mail systems can use DTMF in-band signalling for more efficient call processing. This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to the type of automated attendant and/or voice mail system connected.
CALL and TYPE INFORMATION
The format of the DTMF data sent to a VM/AA port is as follows:
[CALL TYPE] + [DN1] + [SEPARATOR] + [DN2] an example of this would be:
[FORWARD ALL] from [225] on trunk [703]
Each field can be programmed individually as follows:
Option Description
EXTENSION
FOR DN1
If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a station is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send station data in the DN1 field.
TRUNK FOR DN1 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a trunk is ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN1 field.
EXTENSION
FOR DN2
If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating station of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send station data in the DN2 field.
Default
No
No
No
Samsung Business Communications
2-244
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Option Description Default
TRUNK FOR DN2 If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will not send trunk data in the DN2 field
SEPARATOR When both DN1 and DN2 are used, a digit defined here is sent between DN1 and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine where DN 1 stops and where DN 2 starts. The separator can be
DTMF 0 through 9, *, #, A, B or C.
DISCONNECT
SIGNAL
CALL TYPE ID
This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in place of a disconnect open. The digit defined here is sent three times.
This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string and can identify any of the following call types
No Call Type Description
0 DIRECT
CALL
CALL
A call originating directly from another station in the system.
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD ALL set.
4
CALL
CALL
RECALL
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD BUSY set.
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the VM/AA port from a station with CALL
FORWARD NO ANSWER set.
A call is recalling the VM/AA port after being transferred and not answered.
CALL
A Trunk Line call has gone directly to
VM/AA
(e.g., trunk 717 DIL to VM/AA).
6 OVERFLOW A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA port from a station group.
7 DID CALL A DID call has called the VM/AA port.
8 MESSAGE
CALL
A message button or message reply feature code has been used to call the
VM/AA port.
No
No
C
Default
1
2
3
4
4
6
4
8
9
Samsung Business Communications
2-245
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Option Description Default
PROGRESS
TONE ID
CALLER ID
NUMBER
GENERAL RULES
These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port in place of regular progress tones. For example, when a VMAA port goes off hook to originate or transfer a call, instead of hearing normal dial tone, it will hear DTMF ‘BA’. Progress tones can greatly increase the efficiency of a VMAA system because it is easier and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy, ring back or DND tone.
Progress tones can identify any of the following.
No Call Type
0 DIAL TONE Dial Tone
Description
1 BUSY TONE Busy Tone
2 RINGBAK
TONE
Ringback Tone
DND or No More Call Button Error
MORE
4 HDSET
ANSWER
5 SPKER
ANSWER
Off Hook Answer
On Hook Answer
If set to YES, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the VMAA port.
Default
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1. If a station is talking to a trunk and the user presses TRANSFER plus the station number, but the station is forwarded to VM/AA and VM/AA answers presses, pressing
TRANSFER again to return to the trunk disconnects the VM/AA port.
2. If a VM/AA port leaves a message indication for a station and the station replies, any available port in the VM/AA group should ring, not only the one that left the message.
3. If a VM/AA port leaves a message for a station and the station replies, the MESSAGE
LED is not automatically turned off. If a VM/AA system turns on the MESSAGE
LED, the VM/AA system must turn it off.
4. If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled, the system sends regular call progress tones.
5. When a VM/AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE AN-
NOUNCE mode, the phone will be forced to ring.
6. All calls to a VM/AA port or group ring with Trunk line ringing cadence, not intercom ring cadence.
Samsung Business Communications
2-246
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
EXAMPLES OF VM/AA OPERATION (IN-BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING)
In the following example, all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated. X is the separator digit, all-default values are used in these examples and [ ] is not used.
A DIL 701 calls a VM/AA port or group:
[1] + [701] + [ ] + [ ]
In the above example, if Trunk Line information is not used:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is used)
DIL 701 calls a call-forwarded station(205):
[2] + [205] + [X] + [701]
In the above example, if forward information is not used:
[ ] + [205] + [X] + [701]
In the above example, if forward and DN2/Trunk Line information is not used:
[ ] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]
DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM/AA:
[4] + [501] + [x] + [701]
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A DID call rings the VM/AA directly:
[B] + [9999] + [ ] + [ ]
9999 are the DID digits from Trunk Line
In the above example, if did information is turned off:
[ ] + [9999] + [ ] + [ ]
A station transfers(blind or screened) a call(Trunk Line, DID or intercom) to VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer):
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ](Nothing is sent)
A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a station(225) that is Call Forward All to a VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer) and the
VM/AA group or port answers:
[2] + [225] + [x] + [702]
A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a group(501) that overflows to a VM/AA group or port:
[4] + [501] + [X] + [702]
Samsung Business Communications
2-247
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A station(205) calls a VM/AA port or group:
[1] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]
In the above example, if direct information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A station(205) calls using MESSAGE key:
[9] + [205] + [ ] + [ ]
In the above example, if message information is turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
A call(702) recalls back from station 225 to the VM/AA group:
[4] + [225] + [x] + [702]
In the above example, if recall and DN2/CO information are turned off:
[ ] + [ ] + [ ] + [ ](Nothing is sent)
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY
PROGRAM BUTTONS
A
B
C
Used to insert alpha character ‘A’
Used to insert alpha character ‘B’
Used to insert alpha character ‘C’
Samsung Business Communications
2-248
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 726.
Display shows:
2. Enter the OPTION number from the above list
(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button for selection and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
EXT FOR DN1
YES
TRK FOR DN2
NO
TRK FOR DN2
YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
Samsung Business Communications
2-249
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
This MMC is used for system version display only (READ ONLY). The displays depend on which modules are installed in the system
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 727.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to show other modules, e.g.:
LP40
GWIM
GSIM
8COMBO
GPLIM
TEPRI/EP
SVMi-20E
MGI64
DLI
SLI
MP40 VERSION
‘05.03.16 V2.44
C1-LP VERSION
‘05.01.20 V2.43
C1-S01
05.12.17 V1.12
C1-S02
05.12.17 V1.12
C1-S04
NO VERSION DATA
C1-S05
NO VERSION DATA
C1-S06
02.08.20 V1.05
C1-S07
05.08.03 V5.00
C1-S09
05.12.28 V1.09
C2-S2:16DLI
NO VERSION DATA
C2-S3:16SLI
NO VERSION DATA
Samsung Business Communications
2-250
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-251
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE
Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.
The translation table consists of 2000 entries. Each entry comprises a telephone number up to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 728.
Display shows first entry
2. Dial entry number (e.g., 0005)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through entries and press Right Soft button to select entry.
3. Enter telephone number and press Right Soft button to advance to name entry.
OR
Enter telephone number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Enter associated name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
CLIP XLAT(0001)
DGT:
CLIP XLAT (0005)
DGT:_
CLIP XLAT (0005)
DGT:3054264100
CLIP XLAT (0005)
SAMSUNG
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312
MMC 608
ALLOW CALLER ID
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
Samsung Business Communications
2-252
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[740] STATION PAIR
Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a keyset or single line phone. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR
Class, and DND attributes of the primary station. The secondary station will ring when the primary station rings, and vice versa. Features can be set or cancelled at either station.
NOTE: If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301, the change affects both stations. Messages from the secondary extension will display the secondary extension number.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 740.
Display shows
2.
Enter the primary station number via dial keypad (e.g., 201).
OR
Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button.
3. Enter the secondary station number via dial keypad (e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:205
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102
MMC 301
MMC 310
CALL FORWARD
ASSIGN STATION COS
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
Samsung Business Communications
2-253
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN
The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.
DIGITS
Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to 10 digits. These are the entries that will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call. This is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL
PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and
1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or when any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical order.
Wild cards(
∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character assignment (MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.
DIAL PLAN
This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern (1-7, 8). This pattern is used by MMC 433, TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according to
MMC 749, RATE CALCULATION TABLE
When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks
MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.
EXAMPLES
When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, the closest match is 1305 and this will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match.
Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after exact digits. If 1813 and 18
∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is found, it will check 18
∗∗.
Samsung Business Communications
2-254
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 746.
Display shows:
2. Dial CALL COST entry (e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter digit string via the dial keypad and press Right Soft button.
4. Enter DIAL PLAN 1-8 (e.g. 8)
OR
Press Volume button to select dial plan and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
COST DP (001)
DIGIT:
COST DP (005)
DIGIT:_
COST DP (005)
DIGIT:1305
COST DP (005)
CALL RATE: 8
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433
MMC 747
COST RATE
RATE CALCULATION TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-255
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE
The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST
RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.
There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.
No Type Description
(FIRST INTERVAL
DURATION)
This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a fixed cost is applied. The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g. 80 seconds
(three minutes).
This is the cost for the first interval duration in £s sterling or Euros.
The range is 0 to 999; e.g. 345 (£3.45 or €3.45). (FIRST INTERVAL
COST)
(SECOND INTER-
VAL DURATION)
(SECOND INTER-
VAL COST )
4 SURCHARGE
This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval has expired. The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g. 006 seconds (six seconds).
This is the cost for each billing increment, in £s sterling or Euros, after the first interval has expired. The range is 0-999; e.g. 100
(£1.00 or €1.00).
This is a one-time charge, in £s sterling or Euros, that is applied to the call over and above the time charges. The range is 0-999; e.g.
150 (£1.50 or €1.50).
Note: Currency values (£ or €) depend on the setting for the USE EURO option in MMC 210.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL COST RATES: NO DATA
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 747.
Display shows:.
2. Dial COST RATE number 1-8 (e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select COST RATE and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial option number 0-4 (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
COST RATE (1)
1ST DUR :000 SEC
COST RATE (3)
1ST DUR :000 SEC
COST RATE (3)
1ST COST:000
Samsung Business Communications
2-256
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125=1.25)
OR
Press Volume button to select data and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433
MMC 746
COST RATE
COSTING DIAL PLAN
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
COST RATE (3)
1ST COST:125
Samsung Business Communications
2-257
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[750] VM CARD RESTART
This MMC is used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module.
There are four options available in this MMC:
No Option Description
0
1
MBX DOWNLOAD
VM RESTART
When the Built-In Voice Mail module starts, part of the power-up procedure will download data from the system to determine time, date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This must be done at least once, but once done this download feature can be turned off (NO) to save booting time.
If this option is set to YES the Built-In Voice Mail module will immediately restart according to the DOWNLOAD option specified above.
2 VIRTUAL This option determines which type of virtual port to include during
DOWNLOAD the mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.
The virtual port type are as follows:
No Type
0 VIRTUAL EXT
1 DESKTOP ITP
3 MOBILE ITP
Virtual extension number
DESKTOP IP-based phone number
Wireless IP-based mobile phone number
Description
4 BRI STATION
5 VOIP NET TRK
6 VOIP 323 TRK
7 VOIP SIP TRK
ISDN terminal number
VoIP networking trunk number
VoIP H.323 trunk number
VoIP SIP trunk number
8 REMOTE STN Remote station number via networking
There are three methods for connecting voice mail to OS7400:
No Type Description
0 IP-UMS SERVER Connect via separate, unified messaging server
1 SVMi CARD
2 DLI CONNECT
Connect via SVMi-20E module
Connect via SVM-400
Removing Built-In Voice Mail Module
If during any test procedures you need to run the system with a default database and power up with options set to YES, the Built-In Voice Mail database will be overwritten according to the data in MMC 751 and the default numbering plan. If you plan this type of test, remove the Built-In Voice Mail module until the procedure is finished and the customer database is reloaded.
Samsung Business Communications
2-258
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
ALL OPTIONS ARE NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 750.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
3. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
MBX DOWNLOAD
NO
VM RESTART
RESET NOW ? NO
VM RESTART
RESET NOW ? YES
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-259
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It assigns mailboxes to each station or group as required. During Voice Mail module power up, mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry. Once the Voice Mail database has been created, new mailboxes can be added: y through Voice Mail administration, or y by adding a new mailbox in this MMC.
If a mailbox is to be removed, this must be done through Voice Mail administration.
If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system, it will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.
CONDITIONS
Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through
Voice Mail programming.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: YES
ALL GROUPS: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 751.
Display shows:.
2. Dial station number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll the number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
[201] YES
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
[202] YES
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
[202] NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-260
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-261
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[752] AUTO RECORD
y y y y
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. Specific stations in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls (incoming and outgoing) can be recorded.
In this MMC you can assign:
Station number: Which station can use this feature.
Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversations are recorded in.
I, O or B: What type of calls are recorded (in, out or both).
Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.
Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.
CONDITIONS
A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time. The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result in an error message. When a
Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group defined in MMC 601.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 752.
Display shows:.
2. Dial station number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:NONE
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:NONE
AUTO RECORD
STN:201 MB:201
Samsung Business Communications
2-262
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Dial VM number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Dial call type via dial keypad (0: I, 1: O or 2: B)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
AUTO RECORD
PORT:209 CALL:I
AUTO RECORD
PORT:209 CALL:B
Samsung Business Communications
2-263
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[753] WARNING DESTINATION
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the module if the module is removed or is offline.
In addition, any calls that are forwarded to the module will not forward; they will remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered. This destination can be a station number or a group number.
DEFAULT DATA
5000
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 753.
Display shows:
2. Dial station number or group number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through numbers and select.
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
WARNING DEST.
DEST:500
WARNING DEST.
DEST:501
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-264
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[754] VM HALT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It is used to halt the module (take it offline). It ensures that there is no traffic on the module when it is removed from the system.
DEFAULT DATA
PROC (process)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 754.
Display shows:
2. Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC
OR
Press Volume button to select.
3.
If you select 1 to halt, display shows:
Press 1 to confirm.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
VM HALT
ARE YOU SURE? YES
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-265
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[755] VM ALARM
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold.
The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80 % of the available drive space.
DEFAULT DATA
THRESHOLD: 80%
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 755.
Display shows:
2. Enter new threshold level (e.g. 70)
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:80
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:70
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-266
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[756] ASSIGN VMMOH
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It is used to assign each port a Music-On-Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice
Mail module hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to
5099. To use the default music, select the number; otherwise, make sure you record the sound file first. Then, assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port.
For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice
Mail port, e.g., 225. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from group 529 or 549. Now 225 will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308, 309 and
408.
Each Music-On-Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port.
NOTE: If the first Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before boot-up since the
Voice Mail module and the system use port 1 during boot-up to exchange critical information. For this reason, it is suggested you use the last port for VMMOH.
DEFAULT DATA
NOT USED
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 756.
Display shows:
2.
Dial VM number (e.g. 215)
OR
3.
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
Enter VM message number (e.g. 25)
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
SET VMMOH
209 : NOT USED
SET VMMOH
215 : NOT USED
SET VMMOH
215 : 25
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-267
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[757] VM IN/OUT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. It is used to assign each Voice Mail port as used for incoming, outgoing or both-way calls. This MMC must support outgoing calls if off-premises notification (beeper, outbound follow me or outbound notification) is used.
DEFAULT DATA
IN/OUT
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 757.
Display shows:
2. Dial VM number (e.g. 215)
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter option via dial keypad (e.g. IN)
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
VM IN/OUT
209 : IN/OUT
VM IN/OUT
215 : IN/OUT
VM IN/OUT
215 : IN
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-268
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[758] VM DAY/NIGHT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail module. The module can operate in either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode. The mode determines what main menu greetings and options are played to callers and can change automatically (if enabled in the module) according to the settings in this MMC.
This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: DAY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 758.
Display shows:
2. Enter ring plan number.
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3.
Dial 0 for day or 1 for night.
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 1 : DAY
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 3 : DAY
VM DAY/NIGHT
RING 3 : DAY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
Samsung Business Communications
2-269
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[759] CLI RINGING
This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific ring plan destination. Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities.
There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest.
It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number. There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs.
There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station (NO) option. There are five cadences and a Follow Station option (NO) for SLTs. The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
Option
CLI
REJ
PRI
R1: XXX, R2: XXX,
R3: XXX, R4: XXX,
R5: XXX, R6: XXX
TONE
Description
CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be entered.
CID call reject option. When set to YES, if an incoming call matches the CID number and CLI field then the system will reject the call.
CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come in to a station group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID numbers so that calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call placed longest in the group queue has the highest priority.
Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station or station group.
CAD
Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number (No, 1~8)
No
1-8
Calls will ring with the phone user’s choice of ring frequency.
Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this ring frequency.
Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLTs (No,
1~5)
No
1
Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
Calls from the programmed CID number will ring
SLTs with the intercom ring cadence.
2
3
4
5
Calls from the programmed CID number will ring
SLTs with the CO ring cadence.
Calls from the programmed CID number will ring
SLTs with the DOOR ring cadence.
Calls from the programmed CID number will ring
SLTs with the ALARM ring cadence.
Calls from the programmed CID number will ring
SLTs with the CALLBACK ring cadence.
Samsung Business Communications
2-270
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Samsung Business Communications
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 759.
Display shows:
2. Dial entry number (e.g. 005)
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3.
Enter CID number and press Right Soft button to advance to next entry.
4.
OR
Enter CID number and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
Enter reject option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)
5.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
Enter priority level via dial keypad (1-9 or NO)
OR
6.
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
Enter station or group number for each Ring
Plan destination via dial keypad (e.g. 501).
7.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
Dial 1-8 (or NO) to select ring tone (e.g. 2).
OR
8.
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
Dial 1-5 (or NO) to select ring cadence.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
9. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
CLI RINGING(001)
CLI:
CLI RINGING(005)
CLI:_
CLI RINGING(005)
CLI:1234567
CLI RINGING(005)
REJ:NO PRI:NO
CLI RINGING(005)
REJ:NO PRI:NO
CLI RINGING(005)
R1:501 R2:NONE
CLI RINGING(005)
TONE:2 CAD:NO
CLI RINGING(005)
TONE:2 CAD:NO
2-271
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-272
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[760] ITEM COST TABLE
This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10-character name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries (00 to 99) in the table with item 00 reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items.
These item codes, with the exception of codes 93 to 99, will appear on the guests’ bills at checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when printed, will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field will show the number dialled. In addition to the name, up to eight of the tax codes or rates defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.
PRE DEFINED CODES
Description
This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits.
This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits
No Code
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
01
Room Deposit
Phone Deposit
02-88 -
89 W/UP SET
W/UP ANS
W/UP N/ANS
W/UP CANCL
Check In
Check out
Available
Occupied
Clean Room
Fix Room
Hold
A wake up call was set
A wake up call was answered
A wake up call was not answered
A wake up call was cancelled
A guest has checked into a room
A guest has checked out of a room
A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE
A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED
A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING
A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE
A room has been flagged as HOLD
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
Samsung Business Communications
2-273
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
NO ENTRIES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 760.
Display shows:
2. Enter valid code number (e.g., 02) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter item name (e.g., ROOM COST) via keypad
4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax entries.
5. Enter the tax rates that apply to this item (‘1’ selects each rate) and press Right Soft button to return to
ITEM CODE (00)
NAME:RM Deposit
ITEM CODE (02)
NAME:
ITEM CODE (02)
NAME: ROOM COST
ITEM CODE (02)
TAXES:00000000
ITEM CODE (02)
TAXES:11000000
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 761 TAX RATE SETUP
Samsung Business Communications
2-274
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[761] TAX RATE SETUP
This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition, a 10- character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The options are detailed below.
Option
TAX RATE
TYPE
VALUE
NAME
Description
The number assigned to this tax rate. Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the rate field in MMC 760, counting from left to right.
The type of tax. Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage (%) of the cost of an item (e.g. service charge) or is added as a fixed currency value (C) to an item or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage (I) of the cost of an item.
The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.
A 10-character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RATES ARE %
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 761.
Display shows:
2. Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2, via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’.
(Refer to table above)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
TAX RATE (1)
TYPE:% VAL:00.00
TAX RATE (2)
TYPE:% VAL:00.00
TAX RATE (2)
TYPE:C VAL:00.00
Samsung Business Communications
2-275
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
If valid entry, system advances cursor.
5. Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE
TAX RATE (2)
TYPE:C VAL:01.25
TAX RATE (2)
NAME:MIA BED
Samsung Business Communications
2-276
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[762] ROOM COST RATE
This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for the week. Each room cost rate can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday.
EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150 %, 1. MON: 100 %, 2.TUE: 090 % ...
Then, if you set £100 as the room cost when checking in a guest, the real room cost will be
£150 on Sunday, £100 on Monday and £90 on Tuesday.
CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RATES ARE 100 %
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 762.
Display shows:
2. Dial day number 0-6 (e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select day and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter room cost rate (001-999, e.g., 090)
RM COST RAT(SUN)
100% :
RM COST RAT(TUE)
100% :
RM COST RAT(TUE)
100% :090
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 760 ITEM COST TABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-277
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[763] SECOND LCR
This option allows a user to get dial tone returned after the LCR code is dialled, and allows multiple LCR codes to be used. The procedure is as follows:
The user dials E-LCR code £ system returns dial tone £ user dials required number £ system checks number £ if the number matches, the call is routed to the required destination; if the number does not match, the call is routed according to MMC710 for normal
LCR manipulation and routing.
Option Description Range
IN DIGIT
OUT DIGIT
USE LCR NUM
NEXT ROUTE
Digits dialled after the E-LCR CODE.
Translation of IN DIGIT entry.
Used to specify which E-LCR code the IN DIGIT number matches. If ALL is selected the IN DIGIT number is valid for all
E-LCR codes.
Input the trunk group to send the call to. If LCR is selected the modified number is sent to MMC710.
Max 16 digits
Max 16 digits
ALL,
E-LCR1, E-LCR2,
E-LCR3, E-LCR4
LCR, Trunk Group
Number
CONDITIONS
MMC 724 FEATURE CODE : E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4
.
DEFAULT DATA
USE LCR NUM : ALL
NEXT ROUTE : LCR
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 763.
Display shows:
2. Dial Table number 001-200
OR
Press Volume button to select Table number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter IN DIGIT value (maximum 16 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter OUT DIGIT option number (1)
OR
Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
(001)IN DIGIT
(001)IN DIGIT
(001)IN DIGIT
1234
(001)OUT DIGIT
Samsung Business Communications
2-278
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Enter OUT DIGIT value (maximum 16 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor
6. Enter USE LCR NUM option number (2)
OR
Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and press Right Soft button to move cursor
7. Enter USE LCR NUM value (maximum 16 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
8. Enter NEXT ROUTE option number (3)
OR
Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
9. Enter NEXT ROUTE and press Right Soft button to move cursor
10. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS
MMC 711 LCR TIME
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE
MMC 713 LCR MODF. DGT
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAN
(001)OUT DIGIT
7500
(001)USE LCR NUM
(001)USE LCR NUM
9
(001)NEXT ROUTE
(001)NEXT ROUTE
LCR
Samsung Business Communications
2-279
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, an error message will be displayed.
CONDITIONS
A 4-digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 800.
Display shows:
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:
∗∗∗∗
ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE TENANT:1
Incorrect code shows:
3. Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move tenant number and
ENABLE TECH. PROG
PASSCODE ERROR
ENABLE TECH.PROG
ENABLE TENANT:1 enter tenant number (1-2).
4. Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level. 801:TEC.PASSCODE
SELECT PROG.ID
5. Enter the MMC required to begin programming
6. To log out and return to MMC 800, press Volume button to select DISABLE.
OR
Press Speaker button then Transfer button to return to normal display. Programming option will time out.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
Samsung Business Communications
2-280
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800, Enable Technician Program, from its current value.
CONDITIONS
The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old passcode is required for this MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 801.
2. Enter new passcode.
3. Enter new passcode again.
4. If passcode is correct, press Right Soft key to continue and enter desired MMC.
If passcode is incorrect.
System returns to step 2.
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:
∗∗∗∗
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :
∗∗∗∗
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:
∗∗∗∗
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
Samsung Business Communications
2-281
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
Allows the System Administrator (customer) to have access to certain MMCs. For example, it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR dial plans.
This MMC is for both tenants.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 802.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired tenant number (1-2) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to make additional entries.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
CUST.USE MMC :1
102:CALL FWD:YES
CUST.USE MMC :1
102:CALL FWD:NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-282
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[803] ASSIGN TENANT GROUP
Allows the assignment of tenant groups on a per-chassis, slot and port basis. The simple rule is Chassis-Slot-Port = Tenant. The simplicity of this program allows for flexible assignments. The only information needed is the correct correlation of entries.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ASSIGNMENTS: TENANT 1
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 803.
Display shows:
2. Enter chassis number (if no change, press
Right Soft button to move cursor).
3. Enter slot number (if no change press Right
Soft button to move cursor).
4. Enter port number (if no change press
Right Soft button to move cursor).
5. Enter tenant number (if no change press
Right Soft button to return to step 2).
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 -01 T:1
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 –01 T:1
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 -01 T:1
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 -03 T:1
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:2 -03 T:2
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-283
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN
Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones. There are eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones, and 10 controllable levels in the system. This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any desired eight levels within 11.
No
0
1
Option
TX LEVEL CONTROL
MISC TSW GAIN
2 TSW GAIN
CONTROL
Description
Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity (max.: 9) Default values are:
INDEX: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LEVEL: 0 1 2 4 3 5 6 7
Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MP40 card or the external music source of the MIS module (0~7, higher numbers mean lower levels). Default value is 0.
Adjusts the tone sensitivity. There are eight types of matrix connections of the T-Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity (0-7, below).
Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0 in MMC 421.
0 DGP DLI phone
1 SLT SLI phone
2 ATRK Analogue trunk
3 DTRK Digital trunk
4 DECT DECT terminal
5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone
6 SVMi SVMi port
7 WLAN WIP port
DEFAULT DATA
RX
Do not change the default levels in this MMC without the assistance of
Technical Support.
DGP SLT ATRK DTRK DECT VOIP SVMi WLAN
TX
DGPÆ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 +1.9
DECTÆ
VOIPÆ
SVMiÆ
WLANÆ
Samsung Business Communications
0.0
0.0
0.0
-6.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-2.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
-6.0
+1.9 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
0.0 -6.0 0.0 -6.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 +1.9
2-284
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 805.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to make selection (0-3) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)
(a). Select the desired volume level via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next volume level and press Right Soft button.
(b). Enter desired volume data via dial keypad.
OR
4. (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)
Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM
TSW gain and press Right Soft button.
5. (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)
(a). Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW
(b). connect type and press Right Soft button.
Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW connect type and press Right Soft button.
(c). Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll data and press
Right Soft button.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0
Æ0
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1
Æ1
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1
Æ1
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1
Æ3
MISC TSW GAIN
BGM/MOH :0
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT
ÆDGP :+0.0
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT
ÆATRK:+0.0
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT
ÆATRK:+1.9
Samsung Business Communications
2-285
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-286
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL
Allows the pre-programming of a module slot for a specific module type. A module inserted into a system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this
MMC. Modules installed using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan—you should use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, ports or miscellaneous functions.
If a module is removed and a different one inserted, and this MMC is performed, the memory associated with the previous module (e.g., key programming) will be erased.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 806.
Display shows:
2. Enter chassis number via dial keypad (e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
3. Enter slot number via dial keypad (e.g., 6)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Dial 1 for YES to reset module or dial 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
5. Dial 1 for YES to reset module or dial 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
C:1–S:1
8 DLI
Æ8 DLI
C:1–S:1
8 DLI
Æ8 DLI
C:1–S:6
16 DLI
Æ16 DLI
C:1–S:6
RESET CARD ? NO
C:1–S:6
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-287
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-288
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels.
Phone Volume Level
No
0
1
KEY TONE VOL
SIDETONE VOL
Type No
0
1
FX
Type
LINE VOLUME
SPEAKER VOLUME
3
4
MIC TX LEVEL
NOISE GUARD
3
4
MIC LP ATTEN
ACOU DECOUPL
9 MIN RX VOL (28D, 12L, 21D, ITP)
Do not change the default levels in this MMC without the assistance of
Technical Support.
DEFAULT DATA
DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE (SHOWN FOR 21D)
21D
Type
KEY TONE VOL
SIDETONE VOL
HANDSET TX
MIC TX LEVEL
NOISE GUARD
NOISE THRES
ALC THRES
TX/RX THRES.
TX/RX COMP
MIN RX VOL
1
7
3
8
3
5
6
1
1
4
Default Type
LINE VOLUME
SPEAKER VOLUME
NOR.LP ATTEN
MIC LP ATTEN
ACOU DECOUPL
ELEC DECOUPL
T/R RATIO
R/T RATIO
FX
8
2
5
8
2
3
14
4
Default
Samsung Business Communications
2-289
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 807.
Display shows:
2. Enter phone type via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter volume item via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter volume data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
VOL.CONTROL:US24
KEY TONE VOL:1
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
KEY TONE VOL:1
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
SIDETONE VOL:1
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
HANDSET TX :6
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-290
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[810] HALT PROCESSING
Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single chassis slot or in the entire system.
DEFAULT DATA
PROC
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 810.
Display shows:
2. Enter chassis selection via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
OR
Select all chassis and slots (and go to step 4).
HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL
ÆPROC
HALT/PROCESSING
C:1 S:ALL
ÆPROC
HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALL
ÆPROC
HALT/PROCESSING
C:1 S:2
ÆPROC
3. Enter slot number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4. Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-291
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[811] RESET SYSTEM
Provides a means of restarting the system. The system can simply be reset or it can be reset and all memory cleared to default values.
Extreme care should be taken when using this MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to default status.
No
0
1
2
Type Description
RESET SYSTEM System reset only with Smart Media read.
CLEAR MEMORY System reset and make default system with Smart Media read.
FAST RESTART System reset only without Smart Media read.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 811.
Display shows:
2. Enter reset type (0-2) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.
If memory is cleared, system will return with default time and date and default extension numbers.
If system is reset only, it will return to normal programmed status.
SYSTEM RESTART
RESET SYSTEM?NO
SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?NO
SYSTEM RESTART
CLEAR MEMORY?YES
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Samsung Business Communications
2-292
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-293
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[812] SET COUNTRY CODE
Selects the country for correct system programming and operation.
This MMC must be run by the installing technician before any other programming is done.
Do not change the default values in this MMC without the assistance of
Technical Support.
If you change the country selection, the system will restart and all customer data returns to the default status of the selected country.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 812.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
3. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.
SELECT COUNTRY
Undefined
SELECT COUNTRY
U.K.
DEFAULTING SYSTM
ARE YOU SURE?NO
if you select ‘YES’, this will restart the system and all data will be reset to default values.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 811 RESET SYSTEM
Samsung Business Communications
2-294
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[813] HOTEL OPERATION
Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature.
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 813.
Display shows:
2. Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
HOTEL OPERATION
DISABLE
HOTEL OPERATION
ENABLE
HOTEL OPERATION
CHANGE NOW ? NO
HOTEL OPERATION
ARE YOU SURE?YES
RELATED ITEMS
Hotel Related MMCs
MMC 221
MMC 222
MMC 513
MMC 760
MMC 761
MMC 762
EXTENSION TYPE
FAX PAIR
HOTEL TIMER
ITEM COST TABLE
TAX RATE SETUP
ROOM COST RATE
Samsung Business Communications
2-295
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
This enables the on-board customer database (SRAM) to be copied to the Smart Media card database (SMDB) and also allows the SMDB to be copied to the SRAM. A daily save can be programmed to automatically save the SRAM to the SMDB. This ensures that an up-to-date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save time of 00:00 means that no daily save is performed.
It is recommended that the SMDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it. When the
SRAM is copied to the SMDB there is no interruption in service. If the SMDB is copied to the SRAM, the system will be reset to accept the new data.
SMDB (Smart Media card database)
Option Description
S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm
CLEAR SMDB
COPY TO SRAM
Indicates the time the database was saved to the SMDB
Clear SMDB
Copy SMDB to SRAM
SRAM (MP on-board database)
Option Description
S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved
COPY TO SMDB Copy SRAM to SMDB
DAILY SAVE hh:mm The time the SRAM will be saved to the SMDB
A 16 or 32 MB Smart Media card must be installed in order to copy the SRAM to the SMDB.
DEFAULT DATA
DAILY SAVE 00:00 (no daily save)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 815.
Display shows:
CUST DBASE:SMDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
If the Smart Media card is in use, the display shows:
CUST DBASE:SMDB
SMART IS BUSY
2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor. CUST DBASE:SMDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
Samsung Business Communications
2-296
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.
5. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button.
If you select YES, the display shows.
6. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
7. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
8. Input save time.
OR
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
9. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
10. Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to make changes and return to
11. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
CUST DBASE:SMDB
CLEAR SMDB :NO
CUST DBASE:SMDB
CLEAR SMDB :YES
CUST DBASE:SMDB
ARE YOU SURE?NO
CUST DBASE:SMDB
Cleared....
CUST DBASE:SRAM
DAILY SAVE:00:00
CUST DBASE:SRAM
DAILY SAVE:00:00
CUST DBASE:SRAM
DAILY SAVE:23:30
CUST DBASE:SRAM
COPY TO SMDB:NO
CUST DBASE:SRAM
ARE YOU SURE?:YES
Samsung Business Communications
2-297
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[816] CONFERENCE GAIN
Adjusts the gain level for conference calls.
Do not change the default levels in this MMC without the assistance of
Technical Support.
DEFAULT DATA
YES
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 816.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
CONFERENCE GAIN
USE DEFAULT : YES
CONFERENCE GAIN
USE DEFAULT : YES
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-298
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the Smart Media card to the MP40 and TEPRI modules.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 818.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to select program type and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Press chassis number (1~3) to download program
4. Press Volume button to select YES and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
PGM DOWNLOAD
MCP:MPE08301.PGM
PGM DOWNLOAD
LP4:LP450824.PGM
LP40 PGM:C1
DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
LP40 PGM:C1
DOWNLOAD NOW?YES
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-299
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[819] SMART MEDIA FILE CONTROL
Displays the size (in bytes) of various system program files on the Smart Media card. Also allows deletion of a file by selecting the file and pressing the Hold button on the phone.
Files included in Smart Media are described below:
File Name Description
STARTUP.INI
MPExxxxx.PGM Program for MP40 module. Since the MP40 program is not installed on the
MP40 module itself, at least one MP40 program must be included in Smart
Media to start the system
LP4xxxxx.PGM
If you designate an MP40 program in MMC 818, related data are saved in this file.
This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are selected at MMC 818.
PR2xxxxx.PGM
LP40 program. The LP40 program is installed on the module itself. The one included in Smart Media is used for software version upgrade.
TEPRI2 program. The TEPRI2 program is installed on the module itself. The one included in Smart Media is used for software version upgrade
PRIxxxxx.PGM TEPRI program. The TEPRI program is installed on the module itself. The one included in Smart Media is used for software version upgrade.
DATABASE.ENT This file is created in Smart Media when DB is saved to SMDB by MMC 815.
Initially not included, this file is created only when SMDB is created by MMC
815.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 819.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to select program type and press Hold button to move cursor to delete option
3. Dial 1 for YES (delete) or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button (cursor returns to step 2).
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
STARTUP.INI sz:512 bytes
MPE08301.PGM sz:14418432 bytes
MPE08301.PGM
DELETE FILE? NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-300
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-301
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking. Up to 100 link IDs can be entered including SELF ID. In addition, each Link ID is associated with the
IP address and IP address type of the MP40 module for that system.
Option
LINK ID
SIGNAL G/W
IP TYPE
Description
System ID for networking feature.
System IP address for VoIP networking
System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ in MMC 830.
CONDITIONS
‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 820.
Display shows:
2. Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button.
3. Press Volume button to select other link ID and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.
4. Enter other link ID via dial keypad and press Right Soft button.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 821
MMC 823
MMC 824
MMC 830
ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
ASSIGN NETWORK COS
NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
SELF :LINK ID
SELF :LINK ID
11
SYS01:LINK ID
SYS01:LINK ID
22
Samsung Business Communications
2-302
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
Assigns the Q-signalling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI module basis.
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 821.
Display shows:
2. Enter first trunk number of PRI module.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALLING.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
[701] Q-SIG TRK
NORMAL
[701] Q-SIG TRK
NORMAL
[701] Q-SIG TRK
Q-SIGNALLING
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-303
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
Assigns the virtual extension port type.
No. Port Type
00 SLT
Description
Emulates SLI port
01
02
24 BTN SET
12 BTN SET
24 button phone
12 button phone
03
04
05
06
07
08
7 BTN SET
6 BTN SET
28 BTN SET
18 BTN SET
8 BTN SET
38 BTN SET
7 button phone
6 button phone
28 button phone
18 button phone
8 button phone
38 button phone
09
10
21 BTN SET
14 BTN SET
21 button phone
14 button phone
12
13
14
7 BTN LCD
0 BTN LCD
DEFAULT DATA
3501-3522 : SLT
3401-3440: 21 BTN SET
7 button LCD phone
0 button LCD phone
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 822.
Display shows:
2.
Enter virtual extension number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
3.
Select all ports
Enter virtual extension type
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
[3501]PORT TYPE
SLT
[3501] PORT TYPE
SLT
[ALL] PORT TYPE
SLT
[3501] PORT TYPE
SLT
Samsung Business Communications
2-304
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-305
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS
Assigns the class of service for networking.
No Option
01 CALL OFFER
04 CC SIG CONN
05 CC SVC RETN
06 CCBS
07 CCNR
08 CFB
09 CFNR
10 CFU
11 CI
12 CI CAPABIL
14 CI PROTECT
23 CONP LEVEL
26 CT RE-ROUTE
Description
Call Offer
CC Retention of Signal Connection
CC Service Retention
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
Call Completion on No Reply
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward No Reply
Call Forward Unconditional
Intrusion Capability Level (1~3)
Intrusion Protection Level (0~3)
CONP Level (0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)
Transfer By Rerouting
28 DNDO
29 DNDO CAPABL
30 DNDO PROTEC
31 PAGE
32 PATH REPL.
33 PATH RETEN
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
Do Not Disturb Override
DNDO Capability Level (0~3)
DNDO Protection Level (1~3)
PAGE
Path Replacement
Path Retention
Default
2
2
3
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
2
2
Samsung Business Communications
2-306
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 823.
Display shows:
2. Dial the class of service number(01-30).
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial the feature number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
Press Right Soft button to store data.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
NETWORK COS (01)
01:CALL OFFER :Y
NETWORK COS (02)
01:CALL OFFER :Y
NETWORK COS (02)
03:CC PATH RSV:Y
NETWORK COS (01)
03:CC PATH RSV:N
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
Samsung Business Communications
2-307
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally, under networking conditions, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension.
In this MMC, the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial the extension number to call the station on the other node. The access digit needs to be programmed in MMC 724 (‘NTWK LCR DIAL NO.’ option) first. The system allows 96 entries for network dial translation.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 824.
Display shows:
2. Dial the entry number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter digit string for access to node (max. 8 digits) and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter number of digits user will dial (e.g. 3 for 3digit extension).
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Enter max. number of digits system will dial
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
6.
Right Soft button to move cursor.
Enter YES/NO to display other node extension in internal extension number format.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
01:601
Æ
SIZE:0 MAX:00
01:601
Æ_
SIZE:0 MAX:00
01:601
Æ60201
SIZE:0 MAX:00
01:601
Æ60201
SIZE:3 MAX:00
01:601
Æ60201
SIZE:3 MAX:08
01:601
Æ60201
DISP:N MBX:N
Samsung Business Communications
2-308
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
7. Enter YES/NO to assign Mailbox to remote extension automatically.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
01:601
Æ60201
DISP:Y MBX:N
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710
MMC 724
MMC 820
LCR DIGIT TABLE
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
Samsung Business Communications
2-309
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS
Assigns the options used for networking.
No Option Description
0 ADD NUMBER TO NAME Assign to includes the extension number in the name field of
Q-SIG standard message.
1 USE REMOTE VM
2 REMOTE VM NUMBER
Assign to use SVMi on remote system.
Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote
VM is used.
3 REMOTE CID NUMB
4 USE REMOTE ATTN
5 REMOTE ATTN NUMB
Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to
SVMi.
Use Attendant on remote system (RING 1-6, Y/N)
6 SPNET DIGIT SEND
Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Attendant is used (RING 1-6)
Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the network.
DEFAULT DATA
ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES
USE REMOTE VM: NO
REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE
REMOTE CID NUMB: YES
USE REMOTE ATTN: NO
REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE
SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING
Samsung Business Communications
2-310
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 825.
Display shows:
2. Dial the option number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
ADD NUMB TO NAME
YES
USE REMOTE VM
NO
USE REMOTE VM
YES
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-311
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or
BRI module, or it can use the internal clock source.
This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is used.
DEFAULT DATA
PRIORITY 1: C1-S0
PRIORITY 2: C1-S1
PRIORITY 3: C1-S3
PRIORITY 4: C1-S4
PRIORITY 5: C1-S5
PRIORITY 6: C1-S6
PRIORITY 7: C1-S7
PRIORITY 8: C1-S8
PRIORITY 9: C1-S9
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 826.
Display shows:
2. Dial the priority number (1-6).
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S3
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S3
3. Dial the priority data.
OR
Press Volume button to select and Press
REFERENCE CLOCK
PRIORITY 1:C1-S3
Right Soft button to store.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-312
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[827] CRM DSP MODE SELECT
The CRM module has two DSPs and each DSP is operated in one of the modes DTMFR,
R2MFC, or CID. This MMC assigns the DSP mode.
CONDITION
A CRM module must be mounted on the LP40 module. If there is no CRM module, ‘NO
CRM’ is displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
DSP1: DTMFR, DSP2:DTMFR
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 827.
Display shows:
2. Dial the chassis number (1-3).
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial the LOC number (1-2).
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Dial the DSP number (1-2).
OR
C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1
DTMFR
ÆDTMFR
C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1
DTMFR
ÆDTMFR
C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1
DTMFR
ÆDTMFR
C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1
DTMFR
ÆDTMFR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Dial digit to select DSP mode (0-2).
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.
C:1-LOC:1-DSP:1
DTMFR
ÆDTMFR
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-313
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS
This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN-connected device.
The data listed below can be printed.
01. SMDR
02. UCD REPORT
03. TRAFFIC REPORT
04. ALARM REPORT
05. UCD VIEW
06. PERIODIC UCD
07. HOTEL REPORT
08. PMS
The items that are set in this program are:
Description No Option Default
00 DATA
01 CURR STATUS OFF
02 EMPTY BUFF NO
03 UPDATE LAN
04 DESTINATION
05 PRINTER IP
NO
OFF
200.1.1.1
06 PRINTER TCP
07 LAN TCP
10010
10020
08 RETRY COUNT 03
09 RETRY WAIT 010 sec
10 PJL ENABLE FALSE
11 LANGUAGE
12 PAPER SIZE
RAW
A4
13 FONT TYPE COURIER
14 DUPLEX ENAB FALSE
Current status of the LAN printer
Prints all data left in the buffer
Applies modified values set in this MMC
Data transmit destination (Off, Printer, PC, Both)
The IP address of the LAN printer
The TCP port of the printer
LAN TCP port
Re-transmit attempt count (00~10)
Wait time for re-transmit (005~250 sec)
Sets PJL (0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
Printer language (0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)
Paper size (0. A4, 1. LETTER)
Font type (0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)
Sets duplex (0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
16 PRINT TRAY DEFAULT
17 RESOLUTION 300
18 LINE/PAGE 60
Printer tray (0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)
Resolution (0.300, 1.600)
Samsung Business Communications
2-314
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 829.
Display shows:
2. Enter type of data to be printed.
OR
Press Volume button to select the type and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
3. Enter the item number
OR
Press Volume button to select the item and press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
4. Select the data.
OR
Press Volume to select the data and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[01] DATA TYPE
SMDR
[02] DATA TYPE
UCD REPORT
[02] PRINTER IP
200. 1. 1. 1
[02] PRINTER IP
168.219. 83.101
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-315
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS
This MMC provides a means to configure the Internet Protocol (IP) addressing of the
MP40 module.
No Parameter Description
00 SYSTEM IP ADDR Specifies the IP address for the MP40 module.
01 SYSTEM GATEWAY Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local network subnet.
02 SYSTEM NET MASK Specifies the IP subnet mask.
This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices (subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MP40 (without having to go through the designated network IP gateway).
03 SYSTEM RESET
04 SYSTEM IP TYPE
Prompt to reset system MP40 when system IP address is changed. This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811.
Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network.
05 SYSTEM PUBLIC IP The MP40 will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address. Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI module. The system identifies communications to/from this address as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to establish communications with the system, without exposing the
LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.
MODE
Specifies if the MP40 module is automatically assigned an IP address from the Data Server.
08 SYSTEM MAC ADDR For reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware
(MAC) address of the MP40 module.
09 SYSTEM IP VERS
10 DATA SERVER IP
11 FEATURE SVR IP
12 PCMMC ADDRESS
13 SM MANAGER IP
Specify the system IP address is IPv4/IPv6
IP address of Data Server
IP address of separate Feature Server
When the system wants to connect to PC programming, it will be sent to this IP address for a connection message. (Reserved for future use.)
Not used.
14 CTI SERVER ADDR IP address of CTI Server
17 NEWS ADDRESS IP address of News Server
Samsung Business Communications
2-316
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ETHERNET
- The first three parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYS-
TEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus will not be defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MP40 is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each (octet) field. For example 192.168.1.10 should be entered as: 192 168 001 010.
CONDITIONS y y
This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and/or MGI modules on the system.
After changing Ethernet parameters, restart the system to apply the new settings.
DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185
SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1
SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0
SYSTEM RESET: NO
SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
SYSTEM DHCP MODE: STATIC
SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDENT
DATA SERVER IP: 0.0.0.0
FEATURE SVR IP: 0.0.0.0
PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101
SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0
CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0
NEWS ADDR: 0.0.0.0
Samsung Business Communications
2-317
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 830.
Display shows the system IP address.
2. Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers
(e.g. 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10).
Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion of IP address entry.
4. Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers
(e.g. 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1)
Cursor will return to this step on completion of system gateway entry.
6. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
7. Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.
8. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
165.213. 97.185
SYSTEM IP ADDR
165.213. 97.185
SYSTEM IP ADDR
192.168.001.010
SYSTEM GATEWAY
165.213. 97. 1
SYSTEM GATEWAY
192.168.001.001
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE? NO
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE? NO
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-318
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[831] MGI PARAMETERS
This MMC provides a means to configure the Internet Protocol (IP) addressing of the MGI module(s) in the system.
No Parameter
0 IP ADDRESS
1 GATEWAY
2 SUB MASK
3 IP TYPE
4 PUBLIC IP
5 PUB PORT
6 VERSION
8 CARD RESET
9 IP VERSION
Description
Specifies the IP address for the MGI module.
Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local subnet.
Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices (subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MGI (without having to go through the designated network IP gateway).
Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network.
The MGI will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP connections outside the local network using this IP address. If this
IP address is set to 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or the default value, the MGI module uses private IP only. See System IP Type in MMC
830.
Public Port
No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI software.
Reboots MGI module.
Specifies MGI IP version is IPv4 / IPv6.
- IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK—any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MGI module is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each (octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.
Samsung Business Communications
2-319
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
CONDITIONS
This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI module installed in the system.
DEFAULT DATA
IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1
GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1
SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0
IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
PUB PORT: 00000
VERSION: V4
CARD RESET: NO
IP VERSION: IPv4
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 831.
Display shows the first MGI module.
2. Enter MGI number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter MGI parameter number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter MGI parameter.
OR
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
[3801] IP ADDRESS
168.219. 76.101
[3801] IP ADDRESS
165. 10. 1.100
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-320
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE
Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol (IP) address to the VoIP gateway. This
MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.
TABLE (00~62): Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes. Usually when the MP40 module is used as a VoIP gateway, the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has 63 entries (00~62).
No Option Description
0 ACCESS DGT This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access code table then references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of eight digits are available.
1 DGT LENGTH This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to make up the whole access code.
2 DEL.LENGTH
3 INSERT DGT
This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.
If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the destination to continue routing.
Digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is to be inserted in the dialled digits.
4 IP TABLE 1
6
7
IP START
GK USE
This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP address. The system has 64 IP tables (00~63) with 16 entries (00~15) in each table. See MMC 833.
This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.
For example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in the last seven entries of a table, the IP START location would be 8.
IP address searching would start at entry 8.
This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to establish this connection.
Samsung Business Communications
2-321
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
ACCESS DGT: 00~09 (digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE
DGT LENGTH: 1
DEL.LENGTH: 1
INSERT DGT: NONE
IP TABLE 1: 00
IP START: NONE
GK USE: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 832.
Display shows the outbound and first access
code.
2. Enter 0 for O (outbound) or 1 for I (inbound) code table.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter access code table number (00-62) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter access code item (0-6) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5. Enter access code data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 836
MMC 837
VOIP IP TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
1
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
1
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
840
Samsung Business Communications
2-322
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[833] VoIP IP TABLE
This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry (MMC
832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.
When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each
(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010
DEFAULT DATA
TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR
ALL OTHERS: EMPTY
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 833.
Display shows the first table number.
2. Enter table number (00-62) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter entry number (00-15) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will be return step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
0. 0. 0. 0
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
0. 0. 0. 0
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
0. 0. 0. 0
TB(00) ENTRY (00)
165.213. 87.110
Samsung Business Communications
2-323
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830
MMC 832
MMC 834
MMC 837
MMC 838
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
VOIP ACCESS CODE
H.323 OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-324
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[834] H.323 OPTIONS
This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide.
No Parameter Description
00 GATEWAY CALL ID Numeric identifier for system (up to 12 digits).
01 H.323 FAST SETUP Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup method.
02 CALLER ID TYPE This option controls the calling party identification type. There are 3 possible selections :
0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI: shows the calling station number
2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.
06 TUNNELING
07 DEFAULT DIL NO
Enables or disables the need for additional channels using H.245 signalling. Tunnelling allows use of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931 channel.
This allows programming of the default direct-in- line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call.
11 CODEC AUTO NEGO Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation when the MGI is used as an H.323 gateway.
14 SIGNAL PORT Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000.
17 SEND CLIP TABLE Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER (MMC 323), which provides calling party identification when using the
MGI as a H.323 gateway. This provides station ID of the calling station. A single-digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC 323 should be entered here. This is only used when
MMC 405 value is null.
Default
1234
ENABLE
ANI
ENABLE
500
ON
10000
1
FOLLOW
DID TRANS when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724
19 ALLOW GW CHECK When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323 gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.
20 CLIR WITH NUMBER When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.
21 USE OVERLAP DIAL Enables use of overlap dialling
DISABLE
DISABLE
ENBLOC
Samsung Business Communications
2-325
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 834.
Display shows the first option.
2. Enter H.323 option number (00-20) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
H.323 FAST SETUP
DISABLE
H.323 FAST SETUP
ENABLE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-326
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS
This MMC provides various MGI DSP options for both MGI and MGI64 modules.
No Parameter Description Default
00 CODEC-FRAME Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the MGI module. MGI module supports
G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and
G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).
01 ECHO CANCEL Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection and packet delay.
02 SILENCE SUP
03 IN FILTER
This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used. This prevents transmission during the silence period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when enabled.
This option selects input filtering of the DSP. This should always be set to ENABLE.
04 OUT FILTER
05 INPUT GAIN
06 VOICE VOL
08 JITTER OPT
This option selects output filtering of the DSP. This should always be set to ENABLE.
PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-
31 dB~32 dB(0~63).
This sets the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site. Default is 32(0 dB).
This value selects the voice volume. The range is
-31 dB~31 dB (0~63).
This is a scale value that introduces an intentional buffer
(delay) for the transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI module. This value determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.
The range is 00~12.
G.729A –
40 Ms
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
32
32 (0 dB).
4
Samsung Business Communications
2-327
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Parameter
09 MIN JITTER
10 MAX JITTER
11 FAX ECM
12 MAX FAX CNT
13 DTMF TYPE
14 TOS FIELD
15 FAX RETRY
16 RTP CHK TM
17 USE T38 711
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
Description Default
Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.
The range is 010~300 ms
Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.
The range is 010-300 ms.
This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP if errors are detected.
This is the maximum number of channels that can be simultaneously used for Fax-over-IP. The range is
00~16.
There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND, which is industry standard (H.245) type DTMF transport, and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary method.
30 ms
150 ms
ENABLE
2
OUTBAND
An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc, (that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the MGI module. This value can be left at the default value (00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management.
This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP if errors are detected. The range is 0~4 (0 means no retry).
All bits 0
3
This options selects the interval time for sending RTCP. 5 SEC
If use T38 FAX, specifies 711 Codec use Enable
Samsung Business Communications
2-328
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 835.
Display shows the first option.
2. Press Volume button to select MGI and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter MGI DSP parameter.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
MGI:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –40 MS
MGI:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –40 MS
MGI:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –40 MS
MGI:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –20 MS
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 831 MGI PARAMETERS
Samsung Business Communications
2-329
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS
Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional, external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions and Status signalling
(RAS). The settings apply system wide.
When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each
(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010
No Parameter Description Default
00 GK CONNECTION This enables the H.323 call to connect to a gatekeeper.
01 GK ROUTING This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper.
02 GK IP ADDRESS This is the gatekeeper’s IP address.
03 GK NAME
04 ALTER GK IP
ADDR
This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gatekeeper.
(Up to 16 characters.)
This provides an alternate gatekeeper address.
ID
NO
07 GK KEEP ALIVE
This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when registering with the gatekeeper. (Up to 32 characters.)
This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper. (Up to 16 digits long.)
This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is
000~999 seconds.
08 GK DOWN ROUTE This provides an alternate route if the primary gatekeeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER GK.
09 GK RAS TYPE
MODE
12 RRQ FAIL TIME
Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your gatekeeper’s capabilities.
Select ON or OFF for use of Un-register Request
RAS (URQ) messages.
Programs the time frame to re-send Registration
Request RAS (RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.
The range is 1~99.
13 GRQ SEND Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Request (GRQ) messages.
14 USE MULTI E.164 When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164 identifier can be assigned.
DISABLE
DISABLE
0.0.0.0
‘Gatekeeper’
0.0.0.0
‘OfficeServ’
1234
0 SEC
PSTN
AUTO
ON
30 seconds
OFF
DISABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-330
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Parameter Description
15 E.164 LISTS This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string length of 16 digits.
16 GK REGISTERED Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 836.
Display shows the first available option.
2. Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter H.323 GK option data.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
GK CONNECTION
DISABLE
GK ROUTING
DISABLE
GK ROUTING
ENABLE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
Default
NONE
NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-331
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[837] SIP OPTIONS
This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) trunk parameters. The MP40 supports SIP and H.323 on a per-call-per-port basis. The settings are system wide.
When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each
(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.
No Parameter
00 GATEWAY
CALL ID
Description
Numeric system identifier (up to 12 digits).
Default
‘1234’
TYPE
NO
This option controls the calling party identification type.
There are 3 possible selections:
0 GWID: shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI: shows the calling station number (default)
2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.
This allows programming of the default direct-in-line number when digits are missing or incorrect on an inbound call.
Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call.
ANI
5000
5060
TRUNK
Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. 5070
PHONE
09 RE-TRANS.
T1 TIME
10 RE-TRANS.
T2 TIME
11 RE-TRANS.
T4 TIME
12 GENERAL
RING TM
TM
The initial re-transmission time if there is no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is
0~9900 ms.
The maximum re-transmission time if there is no answer, based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is
0~9900 ms.
The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the
ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is 0~9900 ms.
The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.
The range is 0~99900 ms.
After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.
The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.
500 ms
4000 ms
5000 ms
5000 ms
5000 ms
Samsung Business Communications
2-332
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Parameter Description Default
14 PROVISIONAL After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent
TIME waits for this length of time until Timeout ends. The range is 0~999900 ms.
TIME
Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User
Agent waits for this length of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
16 GEN.NO
RESP TIME
17 REQ.RETRY
TIME
ENABLE
Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User
Agent waits for this length of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
After sending General Request, the User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time. The range is
0~99900 ms.
Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional, external industry-standard SIP Server.
Sets SIP server IP address.
IP
Sets the port to use on the SIP Server.
PORT
29 SIGNAL PORT Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default IP path or port used is 10000.
TABLE
33 INCOMING
MODE
Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER (MMC 323), which provides calling party identification when using the MGI as a
SIP gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A singledigit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC
323 should be entered here. This is only used when
MMC 405 value is null.
This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714 (default)
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724
180000 m
5000 ms
5000 ms
5000 ms
DISABLE
0.0.0.0.
5060
10000
1
FOLLOW DID
TRANS
CHECK
When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.
DISABLE
T-GW System number when registering as a trunking gateway. 4100
NUM
4200
NUM
S-GW System number when registering as a gateway for stations.
NUMBER
When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.
38 SIP
REGISTERED
Display the status of registration to the SIP Server.
DISABLE
NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-333
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
39 GW SERVICE When using SIP Server, if this option is ENABLE, then register by user and if DISABLE then register by system number
Domain name for authorization when using SIP Server
NAME
41 GW USER ID User ID for authorization when using SIP Server
DISABLE
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 834.
Display shows the first option.
2. Enter SIP option number 00-38 (e.g. 01) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
GATEWAY CALL ID
1234
CALLER ID TYPE
ANI
CALLER ID TYPE
IP
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 306
MMC 714
MMC 724
MMC 832
MMC 834
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
VOIP ACCESS CODE
H.323 OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-334
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address (PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to connect other devices via an H.323 or SIP trunk. The device which use the PRIVATE IP
Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect the device.
When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each
(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.
DEFAULT DATA
TABLE (80): 165.213.255.255
ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 838.
Display shows the first table number.
2. Enter table number (01-80) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will return to step 3.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
PRIVATE IP (01)
0. 0. 0. 0
PRIVATE IP (01)
0. 0. 0. 0
PRIVATE IP (01)
165.213. 87.110
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830
MMC 832
MMC 834
MMC 837
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
VOIP ACCESS CODE
H.323 OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-335
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION
This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7400 system. During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered. The system default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and default User IDs match the default station numbers. The system default password is 1234. IP phones must be individually programmed with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system.
No Option
00 USER ID
Description
This is the ID the IP phone must match to register with the OfficeServ 7400 system (alphanumeric).
Default
First 99 IP phones are 3201~3299, others are EMPTY
1234 01 USER PSWD This is the password the IP phone must have to register with the OfficeServ 7400 system (alphanumeric).
02 IP ADDR
03 MAC ADDR
This is the IP address of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.)
This is MAC address of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.)
04 SIG PORT This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.
05 VOICE PORT This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when registered with the system. (Read only.) This information will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.
06 IP TYPE This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or
PUBLIC.
07 DSP TYPE This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use.
G.729A (low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).
This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection only; others follow MGI CODEC type.
08 PHONE TYPE This the type of IP phone used, SAMSUNG or SIP
(future). Use SAMSUNG.
09 REGIST CLR This is used to clear the registration of a particular
IP phone. This is similar to unplugging and plugging in the phone and is useful for maintenance.
0.0.0.0.
FFFFFFFFFFFF
6000
9000
PRIVATE
G.729A
SAMSUNG
NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-336
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description
10 FRAME
COUNT
11 JITTER BUF
12 TOS FIELD
This value determines the transmission interval time of
VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.
Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA
DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~90 ms.
An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc, (that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value (00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA
DOWN = PHONE DATA only.
13 S/W VERSION Display IP phone software version. (Read only.)
14 S/W UPGRADE This is used as IP phone software upgrade request command. When YES is selected and Right Soft button is pressed, the system requests IP phone software upgrade with TFTP IP address.
15 TIME ZONE
PUBLIC
17 SIG TYPE
Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone.
When this option is set to USE MGI, the MGI can be allocated between remote IPs in the same private zone.
This option can change UDP/TCP signal type for IPs.
(ITP V3.xx only supports the TCP signal type. If TCP is set and ITP V2.xx attempts to connect, the TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP automatically.)
18 PRIVATE IP Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allocated by phone’s router.
Default
20 ms
20 m
All bits 0
-
-
00.00
NOT USE MGI
UDP
-
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
Samsung Business Communications
2-337
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 840.
Display shows:
2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Enter option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[3201]USER ID
3201
[3210]USER ID
3210
[3210]DSP TYPE
G.729A
[3210]DSP TYPE
G.711
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 835
MMC 841
MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
Samsung Business Communications
2-338
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide.
No Option
00 PHONE VERSION
01 PHONE TFTP IP
Description Default
Sets running IP-based phone and new phone software version with the system.
0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone
1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone
2 2LINE ITP2: 2-line LCD IP-based phone
3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone software.
4 SOFT PC: IP phone emulation on PC (Soft-
Phone application)
5 SOFT PDA: IP phone emulation on PDA (Soft-
Phone application)
8 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone boot program.
9 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version
Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP address.
Defines the method that IP-based phones use to register with the system.
0000
0.0.0.0
0 TYPE: a) SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the
IP-based phones with the value in ITP
REGISTRATION: PSWD parameter (see 1, below).
B) PHONE PSWD: System will authenticate the IP-based phones according to entries made in MMC 840. c) DISABLE: System will not authenticate
IP-based phones.
1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used for registration of IP phones.
SYS PSWD
1234
Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.
0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used for authentication of EasySet server.
1234
1 ALIVE: This is an EasySet link via LAN alive check timer.
0 SEC
Samsung Business Communications
2-339
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description Default
04 CTI LINK OPTION
05 ITP DSP PARA
Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.
0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data to CTI link via LAN.
1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to
CTI link via LAN.
2 ALIVE: This is a CTI link via LAN alive check timer. If this is set to 0, the system will not check link alive.
Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide.
0 M-FRAME: This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data uses DOWN = SYS
DATA only (see 3, below). The range is
10~40 ms.
1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses
DOWN = SYS DATA only (see 3, below). The range is 10~90 ms.
2 TOS: An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external routers, switches, etc, (that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at the default value (00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses DOWN
= SYSTEM DATA only (see 3, below).
3 DOWN: Determines whether system-wide data or individual phone data is used for DSP control of IP-based phones. a) SYSTEM DATA: System-wide data will be used (MMC 841) b) PHONE DATA: Individual phone data will be used (MMC 840)
06 ITP TX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of each level.
07 ITP RX GAIN/HSET Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of each level.
NO
NO
300 SEC
10 ms
20 ms
All bits 0
SYS DATA
Depends on country
Depends on country
Samsung Business Communications
2-340
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Option Description Default
08 ITP TX GAIN/MIC Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level. Depends on country
09 ITP RX GAIN/SPKR Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each level.
Depends on country
UPGRADE
Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with the system.
0 TYPE: a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone software upgraded manually in MMC 840. b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically when phone connected. c) AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically at set time.
MMC
COMMAND
0000 (Disable) 1 START (HHMM): IP-based phone software automatic upgrade start time.
2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software automatic upgrade interval time.
11 MGI ALIVE PERIOD Set the time interval of checking the link connection of MGI module and the system.
13 LICENSE KEY Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connection.
14 LICENSE STATUS The status (Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license key.
10 seconds.
-
NONE
-
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
Samsung Business Communications
2-341
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 841.
Display shows the first available option.
2. Enter option category number 0-13 via dial keypad (e.g. 2)
OR
Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
PHONE VERSION
LARGE DGP: 0000
ITP REGISTRATION
TYPE: SYS PSWD
ITP REGISTRATION
PSWD: 1234
ITP REGISTRATION
OR
PSWD: 8228
Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-342
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[842] SIP STATION INFORMATION
This MMC provides a means of registering the SIP with the OfficeServ 7400 system.
No.
2
3
0
1
Parameter Description
USER ID
HOST NAME
USER PSWD
IP ADDR
When phone is registered, user ID for checking user
Name of phone host device
When phone is registered, user password for checking user
IP address of IP phone
Type of phone connected
CISCO/SAMSUNG
FLAG -
4
5
8
3
6
7
8
9
Encryption algorithm used
CURRENT STATUS connected or disconnected
MAC ADDR
SIG PORT
VOICE PORT
Hardware address of IP phone
IP port to communicate with message to IP phone
IP port to communicate with voice packet to IP phone
IP TYPE
DSP TYPE
10 FRAME CNT
11
12
13
14
PHONE TYPE
REGIST CLR
JITTER BUF
TOS FIELD
SW VERSION
SW UPGRADE
Type of IP address (0. PRIVATE, 1. PUBLIC)
DSP type if communicating as IP phone
(0. G.711, 1. G.729A)
Type of IP Phone (0. SAMSUNG, 1. SIP STANDARD)
Delete information for registered IP phone
This parameter set to buffering count of voice packets in case of transferring ones
This parameter provide guideline of controlling Jitter Buffering operation when voice packet translate PCM voice packet
Set to TOS (Type Of Service) field value
Display registered IP phone version
Set to SW upgrade
Samsung Business Communications
2-343
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
Parameter
USER ID
HOST NAME
USER PSWD
IP ADDR
PHONE TYPE CISCO/SAMSUNG
USER FLAG
AUTH TYPE
ALGO USED
CURRENT STATUS
MAC ADDR
SIG PORT
VOICE PORT
IP TYPE
DSP TYPE
PHONE TYPE
REGIST CLR
FRAME CNT
JITTER BUF
TOS FIELD
SW UPGRADE
Default
Initial IP Phone Number (e.g. 3601)
NONE
1234
0.0.0.0
CISCO
ENABLE
LOCAL
MD5
Not registered
FFFFFFFFFFFF
-
-
PRIVATE
G.729A
SAMSUNG
-
-
2 (x10MS)
00000000
-
ACTION
1. Press Transfer button and enter 842.
2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[3201]USER ID
3201
[3202]USER ID
3202
[3202]IP TYPE
PRIVATE
Samsung Business Communications
2-344
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[3202]IP TYPE
OR PUBLIC
Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-345
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[844] IP STATION TYPE
Assign the IP station type (DESKTOP PHONE or MOBILE PHONE). For example,
ITP-5012L or ITP-5014D must be set to DESKTOP PHONE and WIP-5000M must be set to MOBILE PHONE.
DEFAULT DATA
001~032 for DESKTOP PHONE, 033~064 for MOBILE PHONE.
ACTION
1. Press Transfer button and enter 844.
2. Dial index number (e.g., 033)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Dial 1 or 0 to select type.
(1: MOBILE PHONE, 0: DESKTOP PHONE)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
INDEX:001 [3201]
MOBILE PHONE
INDEX:033 [3301]
MOBILE PHONE
INDEX:033 [3301]
DESKTOP PHONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-346
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[845] WLAN PARAMETERS
This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters.
The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but this must be changed to another value to enable the use of WLAN terminals. In addition, the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.
The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must also be changed to another value in order to use multiple systems in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally described in this MMC.
Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask and
Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected.
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) variables used for the WBS24 (Basic) can be defined.
WLAN PARAMETER
No Parameter Description Default
00 SYSTEM ID WBS24
01 SYSTEM KEY Key used for registering terminals. Different values must be assigned to each system.
02 1 st DNS IP
03 2 nd DNS IP
04 2 nd WBS IP
First Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address
Second Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address
00000
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
168.208.144. 10 IP addresses of all WBS in system used by wireless terminal. Different IPs must be assigned to each system.
05 CODEC LIST
ID used for distinguishing systems in a wireless environment. Different IDs must be assigned to different systems.
CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between
WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and
G.729 can all be assigned.
06 RF CHANNEL Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by
WBS.
CODEC 1: G.729
CODEC 2: NONE
CODEC 3: NONE
CODEC 4: NONE
USE CH 1: 01
USE CH 2: 06
USE CH 3: 11
USE CH 4: 00
USE CH 5: 00
USE CH 6: 00
Samsung Business Communications
2-347
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Parameter Description
07 VERSION
08 TFTP SERVR
09 TFTP FILE
WBS UPGRADE Server IP.
WBS UPGRADE file name.
10 WBS TX PWR TX POWER of all WBSs.
19 CLR WBSREG Initializes registration data of all WBS.
WBS PARAMETER
Default
Version
0.0.0.0
WBS00000.TFP
DEFAULT
NO y
There are two types of WBS, the COMBO AP and BASIC AP. A system cannot use both types of WBS at the same time. The AP type to be used can be set in MMC 849. Depending on the selected AP type, this program displays COMBO AP (CWBS), and BASIC AP
(BWBS). y When using COMBO AP (CWBS)
WBS24 COMBO is connected to a WLI module. Up to three WLI modules can be installed.
(A single WLI module can connect up to eight WBS24 COMBOs.)
When using BASIC AP (BWBS)
WBS24 BASIC is connected to the system through the network and requires an MGI port to provide tone and call path connection.
No Parameter
00 IP ADDRESS
01 GATEWAY
02 NET MASK
03 MAC ADDR
04 VERSION
05 STATUS
06 RF CH.
07 TX POWER
09 TIME ZONES
10 PARA CLR
Description
WBS24 IP address for Ethernet.
Gateway address of the WBS24 Network.
Netmask of the WBS24 Network.
MAC address of WBS24 received by the system when WBS24 is connected.
WBS24 software version.
Alive operation status.
RF channel no. used by each WBS24 .
TX POWER of each WBS.
Time zone service for each WBS
Initializes WBS registration data.
Default
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255.0
FFFF FFFF FFFF
Version
OFF
1, 6, or 11
DEFAULT
00:00
NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-348
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
SIP PARAMETER
No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Parameter Description Default (ms)
RE-TRANS T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP, retransmission is required when no reply is received. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.
RE-TRANS T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC
2543
RE-TRANS T4 RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various purposes. For example, this parameter can be used as the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving
ACK message in an unreliable transmission protocol.
GEN RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the server cannot be sure if the client has received the last reply. Thus, the server must retransmit the reply for this length of time until it receives the requested retransmission. For example, this parameter can be used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for
INFO.
INV RING TM When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the client cannot verify if the server has received the
ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Response. The client waits for this length of time after sending the ACK for the Final Response.
500
4000
5000
6000
1000
GEN NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request. 5000
INV NO RESP Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request. 6000
5000 REQ
RETRY
Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP related Request.
PROVISIONAL On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent must wait for this length of time until Timeout.
180000
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
Samsung Business Communications
2-349
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 845.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
2. When the cursor is on WLAN, press Volume button and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
3. Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, press
WBS24
Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN.
4. Set the items below at the WLAN menu.
SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the
Register the SYSTEM KEY.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to
register.
WBS24
Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.
WLAN: SYSTEM KEY
00000
Register the 1 st
DNS server IP.
WLAN: 1ST DNS IP
0. 0. 0. 0
Register the 2 nd
DNS server IP.
WLAN: 2ND DNS IP
0. 0. 0. 0
Register the 2 nd
WBS IP.
WLAN: 2ND WBS IP
0. 0. 0. 0
Select the voice codec. Select from G711a, G711u, and G729 CODEC.
Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.
Select the usable RF channel. Maximum six channels can be used for a system.
(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)
Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS.
(Default: LEVEL 1~4)
Used to clear registration information of all WBS.
WLAN: CODEC LIST
CODEC 1: G.711a
WLAN: RF CHANNEL
USE CH 1: 01
WLAN: WBS TX PWR
DEFAULT
WLAN: CLR WBSREG
ARE YOU SURE?NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-350
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
5. Set the items below at the WBS24 menu. The selected WBS is as set in MMC 849 (SELECT AP
TYPE option) i.e. CWBS=COMBO WBS,
BWBS=BASIC WBS.
Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS.
Register the WBS24 NET MASK.
Register the WBS24 GATEWAY.
Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS.
Displays the WBS24 STATUS.
Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL. (The WBS RF channel must be selected from the pre-assigned
RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS).
Register the WBS24 TX POWER.
(Default: LEVEL 1~4)
Used to clear the WBS parameter.
6. Set the items below at the menu.
The initial re-transmission time if no answer,
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 500 ms)
CWBS1: IP ADDR
0. 0. 0. 0
CWBS1: NET MASK
255.255.255. 0
CWBS1: GATEWAY
0. 0. 0. 0
CWBS1 : MAC ADDR
FFFF FFFF FFFF
CWBS1 : VERSION
CWBS1 : STATUS
OFF
CWBS1 : RF CHAN
USE CH 1:01
CWBS1 : TX POWER
DEFAULT
CWBS1 : PARA CLR
ARE YOU SURE?NO
SIP : RE-TRANS T1
000500MS
SIP : RE-TRANS T2
004000MS
The maximum re-transmission time if no answer,
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 4000 ms)
Samsung Business Communications
2-351
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent
Server waits after receiving the ACK message.
Based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)
Register the GEN RING TM. The server retransmits the response for this length of time until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 6000 ms)
Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends
ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message. The client waits this long after sending ACK for the Final Response.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 1000 ms)
Register the GEN NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User Agent waits this long.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)
Register the INV NO RESP. Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent waits this
long.
The range is 0-99900 ms. (Default: 5000 ms)
Register the REQ RETRY. After sending General Request, he User Agent waits for the Final Response for this length of time.
The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms
Register the PROVISIONAL. After receiving the
Provision Response, the User Agent waits this long
SIP : RE-TRANS T4
005000MS
SIP : GEN RING TM
006000MS
SIP : INV RING TM
001000MS
SIP : GEN NO RESP
005000MS
SIP : INV NO RESP
006000MS
SIP : REQ RETRY
005000MS
SIP : PROVISIONAL
180000MS
The range is 0-999900 ms. (Default: 180000 ms)
7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
Samsung Business Communications
2-352
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 847 WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications
2-353
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[846] WIP INFORMATION
This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal information.
No Parameter Description Default
00 REGISTERED
01 LOCATED
02 PHONE TYPE
Shows if the terminal is registered NO
Shows if the terminal is connected to the system DETACH
Shows the type of the terminal
03 WLI NUMBER Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servicing the terminal
NONE
-
04 WBS NUMBE
05 IP OFFSET
06 IP ADDRESS
Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal
Location of IP pool of the terminal IP
Terminal IP address
-
-
0.0.0.0
07 MAC ADDR
08 USER ID
09 PASSWORD
10 INSERT DGT
Terminal MAC address
User ID per terminal
Password of terminal user
If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the numbers, provided the entered numbers do not start with a C.O. number, C.O. group number,
LCR, network LCR, or function code.
0000 0000 0000
1212
0000
-
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 846.
2. Dial the WIP number.
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Set the items below at the menu.
Confirm the status of terminal registration for each phone number.
[3301] REGISTERED
NO
[3301] REGISTERED
NO
[3301] REGISTERED
NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-354
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Displays the location of the registered terminal.
[3301] LOCATED
DETACH
Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered terminal.
Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered terminal (currently not used)
Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered ter-
[3301] PHONE TYPE
[3301] WLI NUMBER
[3301] WBS NUMBER minal.
Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal.
[3301] IP OFFSET
Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered terminal.
Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered terminal.
Register the USER ID of the terminal.
[3301] IP ADDRESS
[3301] MAC ADDR
[3301] USER ID
1212
Register the PASSWORD of the terminal.
[3301] PASSWORD
0000
Register the INSERT DGT for the terminal.
(These digits will be automatically inserted in front of user dialling digits when there are more than four digits and they do not start with the trunk access code or feature code)
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
[3301] INSERT DGT
_
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 847
MMC 848
MMC 849
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
WLAN IP/MAC LIST
WLAN CONFIGURATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-355
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[847] WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
This MMC is used for rebooting all or individual WBS24 and for initializing the WLI module. The operational status of the WLI and WBS24 can also be displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button, and enter 847.
2. Select the item number (0: RESET, 1: STATUS)
OR
Press Volume button to select item number and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Select the type (WLI or WBS)
RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO
RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO
4. Select the WLI/WBS number.
If you press ANS/RLS or CONF button, all WLI (or all WBS) will be selected.
5. Press Soft button, or press [1] to select YES, and the WLI/WBS will be initialized.
6. To verify the status of the WLI or WBS, select 1.
7. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RESET :WLI :1
RESET NOW ? NO
RESET :WLI :2
RESET NOW ? NO
RESET :WLI :2
RESET NOW ? NO
STATUS: WLI
C1S1 OFF OFF
STATUS: CWBS:01
Æ
Y N N N N N N N
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846
MMC 848
MMC 849
WIP INFORMATION
WLAN IP/MAC LIST
WLAN CONFIGURATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-356
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST
This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP list. This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during a new registration procedure. If the IP address is already assigned, the assigned terminal number will be shown in the USED field.
Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless
LAN (not yet implemented).
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button, and enter 848.
2. Select the menu (0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST)
3. Select the table number.
4. Enter the IP ADDRESS.
5. A number next to USED indicates the terminal number to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned.
6. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0
IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0
IP:001 USED:
_ 0. 0. 0. 0
IP:001 USED:
168. 0. 0. 0
IP:001 USED:3301
168.219.149. 5
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846
MMC 847
MMC 849
WIP INFORMATION
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
WLAN CONFIGURATION
Samsung Business Communications
2-357
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION
This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.
Parameter Description
REGISTER VoWLAN Enable or disable registration of new WIP-5000M mobile phone.
WIP REGIST CLEAR Used to clear the registration of WIP. FORCED mode clearing is used when the device is not connected normally (e.g. device broken), otherwise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used.
WBS WEP SERVICE Enable or disable the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature
WEP KEY Assign the WEP key (13 characters only)
STATIC WBS IP
STATIC WIP IP
SELECT AP
Select the use of Static WBS IP
Select the use of Static WIP IP
Select if using COMBO or BASIC AP. (If COMBO is selected, a WLI module must be installed in the system. BASIC allows APs to run without this module.)
DEFAULT DATA
REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE
WIP REGIST CLEAR: FORCED
WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE
WEP KEY: NONE
STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE
STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE
SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP (DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button, and press 849.
2. Enter the PASSCODE.
(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202
3. Select ENABLE to register a terminal.
ENTER PASSWORD
_
ENTER PASSCODE
****
REGISTER VoWLAN
ENABLE
4. Select WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration status for a terminal.
5. Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION is selected.
WIP REGIST CLEAR
3301:FORCED
WBS WEP SERVICE
DISABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-358
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
6. Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SER-
VICE is enabled (13 characters only)
7. Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP.
8. Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP.
9. Select AP TYPE of the system.
If you change the AP type, the system must be re-
started.
Select YES to restart system.
WEP KEY
STATIC WBS IP
DISABLE
STATIC WIP IP
DISABLE
SELECT AP TYPE
COMBO AP
10. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846
MMC 847
MMC 848
WIP INFORMATION
WLAN RESET AND STATUS CHECK
WLAN IP/MAC LIST
SELECT AP TYPE
RESET SYSTEM?NO
Samsung Business Communications
2-359
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
This MMC is used for system resource display (used and free resources). This is a READ-
ONLY MMC.
0. DTMFR DSP’S
1. CID DSP’S
2. R2MFC DSP’S
3. CONF GROUP’S
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 850.
Display shows:
2. Enter the option number (0-3).
OR
Press Volume button to select.
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
DTMFR DSP’S
USE:000 FREE:012
CID DSP’S
USE:000 FREE:014
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-360
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[851] ALARM REPORTING
This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. Two levels of faults are displayed via an alarm code: major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously degrade the system’s operating capabilities.
The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a first in-first out (FIFO) basis. Alarms provide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable, the hardware chassis, port, and/or slot will be displayed. Alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided.
ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS (Select one of the options)
No Option
0 VIEW ALARMS
1 OVERFLOW
CONTROL
2 CLEAR ALARM BUF
3 PRINT ALARM BUF
Description
View alarm buffer.
Determines buffer control when buffer is full.
0 OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in buffer is overwritten. (Default.)
1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording alarms.
Clears alarm buffer.
Prints contents of alarm buffer.
ALARM CODE DEFINITION
See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-361
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 851.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired option.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. System displays the alarm count number, date and time stamp.
Alarm type and cause code will display.
4. Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
[00] 02/18 14:30
MNF02 C1-S02
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-362
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that have an Alarm key assigned. The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722 (Station Key Programming). Alarm key programming is tenant wide (tenants 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting (MMC 851). The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First
In-First Out (FIFO) basis. Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system. Alarm conditions that have multiple causes (e.g.,
PRI errors and synchronization loss) will print all associated alarm information if an SIO port is programmed as an ALARM port. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via
MMC 851, System Alarm Reporting.
Alarm Notification Off/On (0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible notification to the system Alarm key station(s). Pressing the Alarm key and the Release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the
Alarm key and the Release key.
Alarm Code Definitions:
Alarm Name No Code
MJA--
01 MJA01
02 MJA02
03 MJA03
04 MJA04
05 MJA05
06 MJA06
Definition
MP Error System Fault
POR Restart
Soft Restart
MP restart process has been executed via power on restart
(POR).
MP restart process has been executed via button reset.
Mem Reset
MP Reset
LP Reset
The system RAM has been cleared via manual programming (PC or keyphone) resulting in a system reset.
The MP has a software exception error.
Alarm data = Reason
- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error
- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error
- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal Opcode
- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero Divide
- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation
- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop
The LP has reset
Alarm data = Chassis (1, 2 or 3)
PCM Switching A fault has occurred in the Switching Control
Alarm data = MP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3
Samsung Business Communications
2-363
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No
08
09
10
Code
MJB--
MJB01
MJB02
MJB03
11
12
13
14
16
17
25
26
27
28
31
32
MJB04
MJB05
MJB06
MJB07
MJC--
MJC01
MJC02
MJC10
MJC11
MJC12
MJC13
MJC16
MJC17
Alarm Name Definition
LP/TASK Error LP or TASK Fault
HDLC Com Error Communications to LP lost or faulty.
Memory Alarm 1 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the MP.
Memory Alarm 2 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in chassis 1
LP.
Memory Alarm 3 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in chassis 2
LP.
Memory Alarm 4 A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in chassis 3
LP.
IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm data = IPC Queue type
Task MSGQ Over Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm data = Error Task
DSP Error System DSP Fault
DTMF Fault
Tone Fault
AA-DTMF Fault An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
AA-MFR Rec
An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system tone resources.
Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.
An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources has recovered.
Alarm data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
E911 Restart
An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position
E911 Block
WLI Restart
The E911 card has restarted.
Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
The E911 card has blocked because the system detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
The WLI module has restarted.
Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
WLI Block The WLI module has blocked because the system detects the module does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Samsung Business Communications
2-364
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No
33
34
35
Code
MJD--
MJD01
MJD02
MJD03
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
MJD04
MJD05
MJD07
MJD08
MJD09
MJD10
MJD11
MJD12
MJD13
MJD14
MJD15
MJD16
MJD17
Alarm Name Definition
DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault
Sync Failure Clocking on TEPRI module has become asynchronous.
Sync Recovery Clocking on TEPRI module has become synchronous.
Red Alarm
Rec
Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI module for more than 250 ms.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Red Alarm Rec PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI module.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Yellow Alarm Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on
TEPRI module.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on
TEPRI module.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Blue Alarm
Blue Alarm Rec A blue alarm condition has been cleared.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Bit Error Alarm Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1x10 -6 errors. Note: 1x10 -6 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10 -3 is threshold for major alarm errors on E1, PRI or BRI.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
NTWRK Event
All 1's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI module.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI
Network digital line. Protocols do not match or subscriber ID mismatch.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
SPID Init Error
SPID Init Rec
The BRI received an error from the network
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)
The BRI has recovered from an error on the network
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)
LPBK Error Internal on demand loopback failed.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)
LPBK Recovery Internal on demand loopback test passed.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)
BRI DL Unavail A BRI data link is out of service.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)
BRI DL Recovery A BRI data link is back in service.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Channel (Cx-Syy-czz)
RAM Error An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI module RAM.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Samsung Business Communications
2-365
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No
50
Code
MJD--
MJD18
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
MJD19
MJD20
MJD21
MJD22
MJE--
MJE01
MJE02
MJE03
MJE04
MJE05
MJE06
MJE07
MJE08
Alarm Name Definition
DTRK Error ISDN or E1 card Fault
E1 Restart
PRI Restart
BRI Restart
PCM Loss
The E1 card has restarted
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
The PRI module has restarted
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
The BRI module has restarted
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
PCM Recovery Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
MGI Error MGI module Fault
MGI Restart
MGI Stop
The MGI module has restarted
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
The MGI module has stopped
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
MGI IP Duplicate The MGI module IP address is duplicated
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
MGI NTWK Error The MGI module has blocked because the system detects the module doesn’t respond via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
MGI NTWK Rec The MGI module has restarted because the system detects the module does respond via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
MGI DSP Error The MGI module DSP has blocked because the system detects the module DSP does not run correctly.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
MGI DSP Run The MGI module DSP has restarted because the system detects the module DSP runs correctly.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
WBS Disconnect Indicates the WBS is disconnected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx
Samsung Business Communications
2-366
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No
64
Code
MNF--
MNF01
65 MNF02
Alarm Name
Minor Error
Card Out
Card In
Definition
Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving
A module mounted in a universal slot has been removed from service or is not recognized by the system
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
A module mounted in a universal slot has been returned to service.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
67 MNF04 Trunk Fault
68 MNF05 Trunk Recovery Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of service is now operational.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
69 MNF06 Trunk
Disconnect
Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
70 MNF07
Alarm Data = Chassis-Slot (Cx-Syy)
Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal
CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
71
72
73
74
75
MNF08
MNF09
MNF10
MNF11
MNF12
Trunk Connect
SIO TxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)
SIO TxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)
E1 Out Of Srv E1 digital line status has been changed to out of service.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
E1 In Service
Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
SIO Out
E1 digital line has been restored to normal service.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
IO port has lost DTR
Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)
76 MNF13 SIO In IO port has regained DTR.
Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6
Time of Day Clock in the MP has erred. 77
78
MNF14
MNF15
TODC Error
TSW Over Alarm The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of available time slots. Maximum 192 per chassis.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
79 MNF16 PSU Alarm There are more ports than can be supported in a chassis and more power is required.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
Samsung Business Communications
2-367
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
No Code Alarm Name Definition
Rec Over-configuration of chassis has been corrected.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
MNF18
MNF19
MNF20
MNF21
MNF26
MNF27
MNF28
MNF29
SLI Fault
SLI Recovery
PSUB Alarm
DSS Alarm
MNG-- Minor Error
89 MNG01 Phone
Disconnect
An SLI module has been detected as out of service via an internal CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
An SLI module detected as out of service has been detected as recovered and is in service via internal CO-
DEC test.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot, Port (Cx-Syy-Pzz)
Indicates there are over 120 ports in a chassis with two
PSUs.
Alarm Data = Chassis, Slot (Cx-Syy)
System capacity of 64-button DSS modules has been exceeded.
SIO RxQ Over SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)
SIO RxQ Under SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm Data = SIO number (SIO: x)
LAN Printer Err LAN printer error has occurred in the MP.
Alarm Data = Data Type (SMDR)
LAN Printer Rec LAN printer error has recovered in the MP.
Alarm Data = Data Type (SMDR)
Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving
Indicates the Phone is disconnected.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
91
92 MNG04 On Hook
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
MNG03 Off Hook Alarm Indicates Extension Off Hook timer has expired.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
93 MNG05 MGI Packet Loss Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more than 10 %.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
94 MNG06 MGI Packet Delay Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more than 500 ms.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
Samsung Business Communications
2-368
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
DEFAULT DATA
ALL OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 852.
Display shows:
2. Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64)
OR
Press Volume buttons to select desired option and press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.
3. To select if the alarm is active, press 1 for
YES and 0 for NO.
An entry will return the cursor to step 2.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
POR Restart
64:MNF01 ACT:OFF
Card Out
64:MNF01 ACT:ON
Card Out
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 851
MMC 853
SYSTEM TIMERS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
ALARM REPORTING
MAINTENANCE BUSY
Samsung Business Communications
2-369
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY
This MMC is used to place stations, trunks and common resources equipment in a maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called. The calling stations display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The station display will still function with station and date.
When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a ‘locked all’ station. Trunks made busy cannot originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination. Common resource equipment such as DSPs, CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment such as page ports and voice mail module ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state.
MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS
Option Description No
0 TRK
1 STN
5
6
2 PAGE
4 DTMFR
CID
R2MFC
7 CONF
8 MGI
Trunks
Stations
DTMF Receiver (4/DSP)
CID Receiver (14/DSP)
R2MFC Receiver (8/DSP)
DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP
If DTMFR, CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted, display will show NONE. If mounted, display will show IDLE by default.
DEFAULT DATA
ALL IDLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-370
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 853.
Display shows busy functions:
2. Enter busy function type (0-8) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter station number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
4. Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK :NONE
Æ
MAINTENANCE BUSY
STN :NONE
Æ
MAINTENANCE BUSY
STN :201
ÆIDLE
MAINTENANCE BUSY
STN :201
ÆBUSY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851
MMC 852
ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-371
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME
Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, and DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests include CODEC tests on analogue trunks and station modules, and tone tests. If the diagnostics cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the tests and retry during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic time during non-peak traffic periods.
DEFAULT DATA
NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 854.
Display shows:
2. Enter weekday number.
(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter hour (24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.
Cursor will advance to next entry.
4. Enter minutes (24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.
Cursor will return to step 2.
5. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851
MMC 852
MMC 853
ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MAINTENANCE BUSY
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN: :
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN:_ :
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN:23:_
DIAGNOSTIC TIME
SUN:23:30
Samsung Business Communications
2-372
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[855] DISPLAY SYSTEM OPTIONS
This MMC provides a means to view miscellaneous hardware and daughterboards in the system without having to dismantle or power down the system to confirm if the hardware is mounted. This is a READ-ONLY MMC.
OfficeServ 7400 Main System
Option
MP40 SW
Cx-LP CONN
Cx-LP LOC y
CxSy SW
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
Description
Shows DIP software status of MP40
Shows the status of LP40/LCP module
Shows location of daughterboard (chassis x, slot y)
Shows the DIP software status of TEPRI module
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 855.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to view options.
SYSTEM OPTIONS
MP40 SW:00000111
SYSTEM OPTIONS
C1-LP CONN :YES
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-373
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technicianlevel programming was accessed. This allows a technician to determine if there was unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The information stored in this log is displayed, for each of the eight accesses, as follows: first line shows the start date and time of access; second line shows the access type (see table) and end date and time of access.
There are four access types:
Type
NNNN
MODEM
LAN
Description
The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly (e.g. 3203)
Programming was accessed by PC programming via the integrated V90 modem attached to the MP module in the basic chassis.
Programming was accessed by PC programming via the LAN connection on the MP module in the basic chassis.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 856.
Display shows:
2. Enter number 1-8 for required access display
(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll.
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
(1) 11/22 11:03
Æ
3203 :11/22 11:27
(3) 11/22 12:30
Æ
3203 :11/22 13:30
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
Samsung Business Communications
2-374
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[857] VIRTUAL CABINET
This MMC is used to program the type of module in the virtual cabinets. The following table shows the available choices.
Cabinet Slot
Max
Ports
Default
Selection
Choice
SLT DGP
Wired
ITP
WLAN
ITP
1
SLT
4
5
2
3
DGP
4
5
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
1
2
32
4
5
8
9
6
7
32
10
11
12
Wired ITP
WLAN ITP
SIP STN
BRI STN
SPnet TRK
SIP TRK
H.323 TRK
SIP
STN
Wired
ITP
IP
UMS
BRI
STN
GCONF
STN
SPnet
TRK
SIP
TRK
Available Not
H.323
TRK
DEFAULT DATA
See above.
Samsung Business Communications
2-375
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 857.
Display shows:
2. Enter cabinet number and slot number (1-12)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll and press Right soft button
3. Press Volume button to scroll and select module type by pressing Right soft button.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
C4-S01:SLT
SLT
C4-S01:SLT
SLT
C4-S01:SLT
DGP
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB
MMC 822 VIR.EXT TYPE
Samsung Business Communications
2-376
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[858] ASSIGN SYSTEM EMERGENCY ALARM
Assigns the alarms to be sent to the Remote M&A PC (remote maintenance and administration) via the LAN interface.
Alarm Code Definition
See Alarm Code Definition in MMC 852
DEFAULT DATA
All OFF
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 858.
Display shows:
2. Enter the alarm entry number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter ON or OFF (1 or 0) for alarm.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
POR Restart
02:MJA02 ACT:OFF
Soft Restart
02:MJA02 ACT:ON
Soft Restart
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
Samsung Business Communications
2-377
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD/PCB version display. This is a READ-
ONLY MMC.
No
3
4
5
1
2
Option
MP40 CARD
Cx M-BOARD
Cx LP CARD
Cx LP-y
CxSyy
Description
Shows the EPLD/PCB version of MP40 module
Shows the Motherboard and EPLD/PCB version chassis #x
Shows the LP and EPLD/PCB version of chassis #x
Shows the daughterboard and EPLD/PCB version
Shows the TEPRI module or MGI64 module and EPLD/PCB version
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 859.
Display shows:
2. Enter the option number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll.
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
EPLD/PCB VERSION
MP40 CARD :V11
EPLD/PCB VERSION
C1 M-BOARD :V11
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-378
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[860] UCD STATUS SERVICE
This MMC sets the information on the UCD queue status or UCD Agent status to send to the SIO port in real time.
CONDITIONS
To use this information, a special PC application is needed. This is not supplied by Samsung.
DEFAULT DATA
UCD VIEW SERVICE: DISABLE
SENT AGENT STATE: NO
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 860.
Display shows:
2. Enter the number.
(0. UCD View Service, 1. Send Agent State)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter YES or NO (1 or 0)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to store.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
UCD VIEW SERVICE
DISABLE
SEND AGENT STATE
YES
SEND AGENT STATE
NO
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-379
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS
Sets a number of system options.
DEFAULT DATA
No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
AUTO UPDATE TIME : DISABLE
SYSTEM SPEED BIN : MAX 500
IDLE WHEN ENBLOC: DISABLE
2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE
2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE
USE LB FOR PAGE: NONE
LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE
ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE
Option
AUTO UPDATE TIME
SYSTEM SPEED BIN
IDLE WHEN ENBLOC
2 LINE ENBLOCK
2 ZONE EXT PAGE
USE LB FOR PAGE
LP TRK TONE DISC
ISDN SS FEATURE
Description
Updates the system time from the ISDN network (Enable / Disable).
Sets 500 (dial 0) or 950 (dial 1) as the maximum number of system speed dial bins. If 950 is set, speed dial bin numbers are always three digits (000 to 999).
Decides the state of Large LCD phones (idle or busy) when users are dialling in ENBLOC mode (Enable / Disable).
Enables ENBLOC dialling for 2-line LCD phones with navigation buttons (Enable / Disable).
Enables paging to two external zones (one zone available by default) (Enable / Disable).
Use Loud Bell port for paging zone.
When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone.
Enables ISDN Supplementary Services (Enable / Disable).
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 861.
Display shows:
2. Enter the option number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to store.
AUTO UPDATE TIME
DISABLE
AUTO UPDATE TIME
DISABLE
AUTO UPDATE TIME
ENABLE
Samsung Business Communications
2-380
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 505
MMC 606
MMC 705
MMC 706
MMC 722
MMC 723
KEY EXTENDER
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications
2-381
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[865] FAN POWER CONTROL
This MMC controls the power of the fans in the chassis.
.
CONDITIONS
NONE
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 865.
Display shows:
2. Select the chassis number (1~3)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3. Enter OFF to switch off power to the fan or ON to switch power on
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to store.
4. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
FAN PWR CONTROL
CABINET1 FAN:OFF
FAN PWR CONTROL
CABINET1 FAN:OFF
FAN PWR CONTROL
CABINET1 FAN:ON
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications
2-382
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
[889] DISPLAY SERVER STATUS
This MMC displays the history of connection and disconnection to the Data Server and
Feature Server with the MP40 card. Also allows you to clear the recorded history log.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
ACTION
1. Press Transfer button and enter 889.
Display shows:
2. Press Volume button to scroll displays
3. Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
DISPLAY
TOTAL LOG CNT : 00
CLR RECORDED? NO
(01) 11/11 11:10
CONN-FEAT SERVER
(02) 11/13 11:20
CONN-FEAT SERVER
Samsung Business Communications
2-383
ANNEX. Abbreviations
A
Application Level Gateway
Answering Machine Emulation
Add-On Module
B
ALG
AME
AOM
C
BRI
CCBS
CCNR
CID
CLI
COS
CPLD
CR Mode
CSU
Basic Rate Interface
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
Call Completion on No Reply
Caller Identification
Calling Line Identification
Class Of Service
Complex Programmable Logic Device
Constant Resistance Mode
Communication Service Unit
Samsung Business Communications A-1
ANNEX. Abbreviations OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
D
DASL
DECT
DGP
DHCP
Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops
Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications
Digital Phone
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DLI
DND
DPIM
DSP
DSU
DTMF
Digital Line Interface
Do Not Disturb
Door Phone Interface Module
Digital Signal Processor
Data Service Unit
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
E
G
E&M Ear&Mouth
Expanded Switch Module ESM
H
GK Gatekeeper
GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
HDLC
HLR
HTML
HTTP
High-level Data Link Control
Home Location Register
Hypertext Markup Language
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
Samsung Business Communications A-2
ANNEX. Abbreviations
I
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
ID Identification
IDS Intrusion Detection System
IGMP
IMAP
IN-SCP
Internet Group Management Protocol
Internet Messaging Access Protocol
Intelligent Network Service Control Point
IPDC
IPM
IP-SCP
ISDN
ISUP
Internet Protocol Device Control
Inter-Processor communications and memory Module
Internet Protocol Service Control Point
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISDN User Part
K
L
LED
LIM
M
MDF
MFM
MGC
MGI
MGCP
MP40
MWSLI
Light Emitting Diode
LAN Interface Module
Main Distribution Frame
Multi Frequency Module
Media Gateway Controller
Media Gateway Interface
Media Gateway Control Protocol
Main (control) Processor
Message Waiting Single Line Interface
Samsung Business Communications A-3
ANNEX. Abbreviations OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
N
O
NMS
P
Network Management System
Q
PBA
PCB
PCM
PLL
POP3
PPP
PPPoE
PRS
PSTN
Printed (circuit) Board Assembly
Printed Circuit Board
Pulse Code Modulation
Phase Locking Loop
Post Office Protocol version 3
Point to Point Protocol
Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
Polarity Reverse Detection
Public Switched Telephone Network
R
Q-SIG Q-Signalling
RIP
RTCP
Routing Information Protocol
Real-time Transmission Control Protocol
Samsung Business Communications A-4
ANNEX. Abbreviations
S
SCM
SDP
SGCP
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Switch and Conference Module
Session Description Protocol
Simple Gateway Control Protocol
T
SIP
SLI
SLT
SMDR
SMTP
SoL
STA
SVMi
TAPI
Session Initiation Protocol
Single Line Interface
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Server optimized Linux
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Samsung Voice Mail (integrated)
Telephony Application Programming Interface
U
TEPRI T1/E1/PRI
TRK Trunk
UART
UCD
UDP
USB
Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter
Uniform Call Distribution
User Datagram Protocol
Universal Serial Bus
Samsung Business Communications A-5
ANNEX. Abbreviations
V
W
VoIP
VPM
X
WIM
WLI xDSL
Voice over Internet Protocol
Voice Processing Module
WAN Interface Module
Wireless LAN Interface x-Digital Subscriber Line
OfficeServ 7400 Programming Guide
Samsung Business Communications A-6
Samsung Business Communications
Brookside Business Park, Greengate, Middleton, Manchester M24 1GS
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 2 Publication Information
- 3 EU Declaration of Conformity
- 4 Intended Use
- 5 Introduction
- 7 Warning
- 7 Caution
- 8 Table of Contents
- 10 Chapter 1. Overview of MMC Programming
- 10 Introduction to Programming
- 11 Phones Used for Programming
- 14 Precautions When Programming
- 15 Program (MMC) List By Programming Level
- 23 Program (MMC) List by Name
- 29 Program (MMC) List by Function
- 33 Chapter 2. MMC Programming
- 33 Summary of Programming Procedures
- 34 Programming Procedures
- 34 100-125
- 74 200-224
- 100 300-323
- 126 400-436
- 174 500-515
- 202 600-616
- 227 700-763
- 313 800-890
- 417 Annex. Abbreviations